gnunet-svn
[Top][All Lists]

## [GNUnet-SVN] r5724 - in branches/flightrecorder: . src src/flighrecorder

 From: gnunet Subject: [GNUnet-SVN] r5724 - in branches/flightrecorder: . src src/flighrecorderd src/include src/util Date: Thu, 1 Nov 2007 11:59:32 -0600 (MDT)

Author: durner
Date: 2007-11-01 11:59:32 -0600 (Thu, 01 Nov 2007)
New Revision: 5724

branches/flightrecorder/AUTHORS
branches/flightrecorder/COPYING
branches/flightrecorder/ChangeLog
branches/flightrecorder/INSTALL
branches/flightrecorder/Makefile.am
branches/flightrecorder/NEWS
branches/flightrecorder/TODO
branches/flightrecorder/acinclude.m4
branches/flightrecorder/aclocal.m4
branches/flightrecorder/configure.in
branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.1
branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.lsm.in
branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.spec.in
branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.texinfo
branches/flightrecorder/gpl.texinfo
branches/flightrecorder/install-sh
branches/flightrecorder/src/
branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/
branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/flightrecorder.c
branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/getopt.c
branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/getopt.h
branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/getopt1.c
branches/flightrecorder/src/include/
branches/flightrecorder/src/include/system.h
branches/flightrecorder/src/include/xmalloc.h
branches/flightrecorder/src/util/
branches/flightrecorder/src/util/xmalloc.c
branches/flightrecorder/texinfo.tex
Log:
start

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/AUTHORS                             (rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/AUTHORS     2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1 @@

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/COPYING                             (rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/COPYING     2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
+                      Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+     59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+                           Preamble
+
+  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+  We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+  Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+   TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+  0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License.  The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+  2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+    stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+    b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+    whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+    part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+    parties under the terms of this License.
+
+    c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+    when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+    interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+    announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+    notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+    a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+    these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+    License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+    does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+    the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+
+  3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+    a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+    source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+    1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+    years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+    cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+    machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+    distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+    customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+    to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
+    allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+    received the program in object code or executable form with such
+    an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+  4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+  6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+
+  7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+  8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+  9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of
+Foundation.
+
+  10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+                           NO WARRANTY
+
+  11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+                    END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+           How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+    the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+    (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+    GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+    Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+    Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year  name of author
+    Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type show w'.
+    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+    under certain conditions; type show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands show w' and show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than show w' and show c'; they could even be
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+  Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+  Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+  <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
+  Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/ChangeLog                           (rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/ChangeLog   2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+
+       * flightrecorder: initial version.
+

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/INSTALL                             (rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/INSTALL     2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
+Installation Instructions
+*************************
+
+Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005 Free
+Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+This file is free documentation; the Free Software Foundation gives
+unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it.
+
+Basic Installation
+==================
+
+These are generic installation instructions.
+
+   The configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for
+various system-dependent variables used during compilation.  It uses
+those values to create a Makefile' in each directory of the package.
+It may also create one or more .h' files containing system-dependent
+definitions.  Finally, it creates a shell script config.status' that
+you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, and a
+file config.log' containing compiler output (useful mainly for
+debugging configure').
+
+   It can also use an optional file (typically called config.cache'
+and enabled with --cache-file=config.cache' or simply -C') that saves
+the results of its tests to speed up reconfiguring.  (Caching is
+disabled by default to prevent problems with accidental use of stale
+cache files.)
+
+   If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try
+to figure out how configure' could check whether to do them, and mail
+diffs or instructions to the address given in the README' so they can
+be considered for the next release.  If you are using the cache, and at
+some point config.cache' contains results you don't want to keep, you
+may remove or edit it.
+
+   The file configure.ac' (or configure.in') is used to create
+configure' by a program called autoconf'.  You only need
+configure.ac' if you want to change it or regenerate configure' using
+a newer version of autoconf'.
+
+The simplest way to compile this package is:
+
+  1. cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type
+     ./configure' to configure the package for your system.  If you're
+     using csh' on an old version of System V, you might need to type
+     sh ./configure' instead to prevent csh' from trying to execute
+     configure' itself.
+
+     Running configure' takes awhile.  While running, it prints some
+     messages telling which features it is checking for.
+
+  2. Type make' to compile the package.
+
+  3. Optionally, type make check' to run any self-tests that come with
+     the package.
+
+  4. Type make install' to install the programs and any data files and
+     documentation.
+
+  5. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the
+     source code directory by typing make clean'.  To also remove the
+     files that configure' created (so you can compile the package for
+     a different kind of computer), type make distclean'.  There is
+     also a make maintainer-clean' target, but that is intended mainly
+     for the package's developers.  If you use it, you may have to get
+     all sorts of other programs in order to regenerate files that came
+     with the distribution.
+
+Compilers and Options
+=====================
+
+Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that the
+configure' script does not know about.  Run ./configure --help' for
+details on some of the pertinent environment variables.
+
+   You can give configure' initial values for configuration parameters
+by setting variables in the command line or in the environment.  Here
+is an example:
+
+     ./configure CC=c89 CFLAGS=-O2 LIBS=-lposix
+
+   *Note Defining Variables::, for more details.
+
+Compiling For Multiple Architectures
+====================================
+
+You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the
+same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their
+own directory.  To do this, you must use a version of make' that
+supports the VPATH' variable, such as GNU make'.  cd' to the
+directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run
+the configure' script.  configure' automatically checks for the
+source code in the directory that configure' is in and in ..'.
+
+   If you have to use a make' that does not support the VPATH'
+variable, you have to compile the package for one architecture at a
+time in the source code directory.  After you have installed the
+package for one architecture, use make distclean' before reconfiguring
+for another architecture.
+
+Installation Names
+==================
+
+By default, make install' installs the package's commands under
+/usr/local/bin', include files under /usr/local/include', etc.  You
+can specify an installation prefix other than /usr/local' by giving
+configure' the option --prefix=PREFIX'.
+
+   You can specify separate installation prefixes for
+architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files.  If you
+pass the option --exec-prefix=PREFIX' to configure', the package uses
+PREFIX as the prefix for installing programs and libraries.
+Documentation and other data files still use the regular prefix.
+
+   In addition, if you use an unusual directory layout you can give
+options like --bindir=DIR' to specify different values for particular
+kinds of files.  Run configure --help' for a list of the directories
+you can set and what kinds of files go in them.
+
+   If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed
+with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving configure' the
+option --program-prefix=PREFIX' or --program-suffix=SUFFIX'.
+
+Optional Features
+=================
+
+Some packages pay attention to --enable-FEATURE' options to
+configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package.
+They may also pay attention to --with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE
+is something like gnu-as' or x' (for the X Window System).  The
+README' should mention any --enable-' and --with-' options that the
+package recognizes.
+
+   For packages that use the X Window System, configure' can usually
+find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't,
+you can use the configure' options --x-includes=DIR' and
+--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations.
+
+Specifying the System Type
+==========================
+
+There may be some features configure' cannot figure out automatically,
+but needs to determine by the type of machine the package will run on.
+Usually, assuming the package is built to be run on the _same_
+architectures, configure' can figure that out, but if it prints a
+message saying it cannot guess the machine type, give it the
+--build=TYPE' option.  TYPE can either be a short name for the system
+type, such as sun4', or a canonical name which has the form:
+
+     CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM
+
+where SYSTEM can have one of these forms:
+
+     OS KERNEL-OS
+
+   See the file config.sub' for the possible values of each field.  If
+config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't
+need to know the machine type.
+
+   If you are _building_ compiler tools for cross-compiling, you should
+use the option --target=TYPE' to select the type of system they will
+produce code for.
+
+   If you want to _use_ a cross compiler, that generates code for a
+platform different from the build platform, you should specify the
+"host" platform (i.e., that on which the generated programs will
+eventually be run) with --host=TYPE'.
+
+Sharing Defaults
+================
+
+If you want to set default values for configure' scripts to share, you
+can create a site shell script called config.site' that gives default
+values for variables like CC', cache_file', and prefix'.
+configure' looks for PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then
+PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists.  Or, you can set the
+CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script.
+A warning: not all configure' scripts look for a site script.
+
+Defining Variables
+==================
+
+Variables not defined in a site shell script can be set in the
+environment passed to configure'.  However, some packages may run
+configure again during the build, and the customized values of these
+variables may be lost.  In order to avoid this problem, you should set
+them in the configure' command line, using VAR=value'.  For example:
+
+     ./configure CC=/usr/local2/bin/gcc
+
+causes the specified gcc' to be used as the C compiler (unless it is
+overridden in the site shell script).  Here is a another example:
+
+     /bin/bash ./configure CONFIG_SHELL=/bin/bash
+
+Here the CONFIG_SHELL=/bin/bash' operand causes subsequent
+configuration-related scripts to be executed by /bin/bash'.
+
+configure' Invocation
+======================
+
+configure' recognizes the following options to control how it operates.
+
+--help'
+-h'
+     Print a summary of the options to configure', and exit.
+
+--version'
+-V'
+     Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the configure'
+     script, and exit.
+
+--cache-file=FILE'
+     Enable the cache: use and save the results of the tests in FILE,
+     traditionally config.cache'.  FILE defaults to /dev/null' to
+     disable caching.
+
+--config-cache'
+-C'
+     Alias for --cache-file=config.cache'.
+
+--quiet'
+--silent'
+-q'
+     Do not print messages saying which checks are being made.  To
+     suppress all normal output, redirect it to /dev/null' (any error
+     messages will still be shown).
+
+--srcdir=DIR'
+     Look for the package's source code in directory DIR.  Usually
+     configure' can determine that directory automatically.
+
+configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options.  Run
+configure --help' for more details.
+

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/Makefile.am                         (rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/Makefile.am 2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+bin_PROGRAMS=flightrecorder
+flightrecorder_SOURCES=flightrecorder.c flightrecorder.1 xmalloc.c system.h
aclocal.m4 getopt.c getopt1.c getopt.h
+
+#  uncomment the following if flightrecorder requires the math library
+
+EXTRA_DIST=flightrecorder.lsm.in flightrecorder.spec.in flightrecorder.texinfo
+
+#  if you write a self-test script named chk', uncomment the
+#  following and add chk' to the EXTRA_DIST list
+#TESTS=chk
+
+#  build and install the .info pages
+info_TEXINFOS = flightrecorder.texinfo
+flightrecorder_TEXINFOS = gpl.texinfo
+
+#  install the man pages
+man_MANS=flightrecorder.1

===================================================================

===================================================================
+++ branches/flightrecorder/README      2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+       flightrecorder - A recorder for runtime information gathered by AOP
advices or other process internal checks
+
+
+
+  Copyright (C) 2007 Nils Durner
+
+  flightrecorder is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+  (at your option) any later version.
+
+  This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+  GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+  along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+  Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
+
+

===================================================================

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/acinclude.m4                                (rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/acinclude.m4        2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev
5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+#serial 3
+
+dnl From Jim Meyering
+
+dnl Define HAVE_STRUCT_UTIMBUF if struct utimbuf' is declared --
+dnl usually in <utime.h>.
+dnl Some systems have utime.h but don't declare the struct anywhere.
+
+AC_DEFUN(jm_CHECK_TYPE_STRUCT_UTIMBUF,
+[
+  AC_CACHE_CHECK([for struct utimbuf], fu_cv_sys_struct_utimbuf,
+    [AC_TRY_COMPILE(
+      [
+#ifdef TIME_WITH_SYS_TIME
+# include <sys/time.h>
+# include <time.h>
+#else
+# ifdef HAVE_SYS_TIME_H
+#  include <sys/time.h>
+# else
+#  include <time.h>
+# endif
+#endif
+#ifdef HAVE_UTIME_H
+# include <utime.h>
+#endif
+      ],
+      [static struct utimbuf x; x.actime = x.modtime;],
+      fu_cv_sys_struct_utimbuf=yes,
+      fu_cv_sys_struct_utimbuf=no)
+    ])
+
+  if test $fu_cv_sys_struct_utimbuf = yes; then + AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(HAVE_STRUCT_UTIMBUF, 1, +[Define if struct utimbuf is declared -- usually in <utime.h>. + Some systems have utime.h but don't declare the struct anywhere. ]) + fi +]) Added: branches/flightrecorder/aclocal.m4 =================================================================== --- branches/flightrecorder/aclocal.m4 (rev 0) +++ branches/flightrecorder/aclocal.m4 2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724) @@ -0,0 +1,863 @@ +# generated automatically by aclocal 1.9.6 -*- Autoconf -*- + +# Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, +# 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +# Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION(VERSION) +# ---------------------------- +# Automake X.Y traces this macro to ensure aclocal.m4 has been +# generated from the m4 files accompanying Automake X.Y. +AC_DEFUN([AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION], [am__api_version="1.9"]) + +# AM_SET_CURRENT_AUTOMAKE_VERSION +# ------------------------------- +# Call AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION so it can be traced. +# This function is AC_REQUIREd by AC_INIT_AUTOMAKE. +AC_DEFUN([AM_SET_CURRENT_AUTOMAKE_VERSION], + [AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION([1.9.6])]) + +# AM_AUX_DIR_EXPAND -*- Autoconf -*- + +# Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# For projects using AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR([foo]), Autoconf sets +#$ac_aux_dir to $srcdir/foo'. In other projects, it is set to +# $srcdir', $srcdir/..', or $srcdir/../..'.
+#
+# Of course, Automake must honor this variable whenever it calls a
+# tool from the auxiliary directory.  The problem is that $srcdir (and +# therefore$ac_aux_dir as well) can be either absolute or relative,
+# depending on how configure is run.  This is pretty annoying, since
+# it makes $ac_aux_dir quite unusable in subdirectories: in the top +# source directory, any form will work fine, but in subdirectories a +# relative path needs to be adjusted first. +# +#$ac_aux_dir/missing
+#    fails when called from a subdirectory if $ac_aux_dir is relative +#$top_srcdir/$ac_aux_dir/missing +# fails if$ac_aux_dir is absolute,
+#    fails when called from a subdirectory in a VPATH build with
+#          a relative $ac_aux_dir +# +# The reason of the latter failure is that$top_srcdir and $ac_aux_dir +# are both prefixed by$srcdir.  In an in-source build this is usually
+# harmless because $srcdir is .', but things will broke when you +# start a VPATH build or use an absolute$srcdir.
+#
+# So we could use something similar to $top_srcdir/$ac_aux_dir/missing,
+# iff we strip the leading $srcdir from$ac_aux_dir.  That would be:
+#   am_aux_dir='\$(top_srcdir)/'expr "$ac_aux_dir" : "$srcdir//*$$.*$$" +# and then we would define$MISSING as
+#   MISSING="\${SHELL}$am_aux_dir/missing"
+# This will work as long as MISSING is not called from configure, because
+# unfortunately $(top_srcdir) has no meaning in configure. +# However there are other variables, like CC, which are often used in +# configure, and could therefore not use this "fixed"$ac_aux_dir.
+#
+# Another solution, used here, is to always expand $ac_aux_dir to an +# absolute PATH. The drawback is that using absolute paths prevent a +# configured tree to be moved without reconfiguration. + +AC_DEFUN([AM_AUX_DIR_EXPAND], +[dnl Rely on autoconf to set up CDPATH properly. +AC_PREREQ([2.50])dnl +# expand$ac_aux_dir to an absolute path
+am_aux_dir=cd $ac_aux_dir && pwd +]) + +# AM_CONDITIONAL -*- Autoconf -*- + +# Copyright (C) 1997, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2004, 2005 +# Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# serial 7 + +# AM_CONDITIONAL(NAME, SHELL-CONDITION) +# ------------------------------------- +# Define a conditional. +AC_DEFUN([AM_CONDITIONAL], +[AC_PREREQ(2.52)dnl + ifelse([$1], [TRUE],  [AC_FATAL([$0: invalid condition:$1])],
+       [$1], [FALSE], [AC_FATAL([$0: invalid condition: $1])])dnl +AC_SUBST([$1_TRUE])
+AC_SUBST([$1_FALSE]) +if$2; then
+  $1_TRUE= +$1_FALSE='#'
+else
+  $1_TRUE='#' +$1_FALSE=
+fi
+AC_CONFIG_COMMANDS_PRE(
+[if test -z "${$1_TRUE}" && test -z "${$1_FALSE}"; then
+  AC_MSG_ERROR([[conditional "$1" was never defined. +Usually this means the macro was only invoked conditionally.]]) +fi])]) + + +# Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 +# Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# serial 8 + +# There are a few dirty hacks below to avoid letting AC_PROG_CC' be +# written in clear, in which case automake, when reading aclocal.m4, +# will think it sees a *use*, and therefore will trigger all it's +# C support machinery. Also note that it means that autoscan, seeing +# CC etc. in the Makefile, will ask for an AC_PROG_CC use... + + +# _AM_DEPENDENCIES(NAME) +# ---------------------- +# See how the compiler implements dependency checking. +# NAME is "CC", "CXX", "GCJ", or "OBJC". +# We try a few techniques and use that to set a single cache variable. +# +# We don't AC_REQUIRE the corresponding AC_PROG_CC since the latter was +# modified to invoke _AM_DEPENDENCIES(CC); we would have a circular +# dependency, and given that the user is not expected to run this macro, +# just rely on AC_PROG_CC. +AC_DEFUN([_AM_DEPENDENCIES], +[AC_REQUIRE([AM_SET_DEPDIR])dnl +AC_REQUIRE([AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS])dnl +AC_REQUIRE([AM_MAKE_INCLUDE])dnl +AC_REQUIRE([AM_DEP_TRACK])dnl + +ifelse([$1], CC,   [depcc="$CC" am_compiler_list=], + [$1], CXX,  [depcc="$CXX" am_compiler_list=], + [$1], OBJC, [depcc="$OBJC" am_compiler_list='gcc3 gcc'], + [$1], GCJ,  [depcc="$GCJ" am_compiler_list='gcc3 gcc'], + [depcc="$$1" am_compiler_list=]) + +AC_CACHE_CHECK([dependency style of depcc], + [am_cv_1_dependencies_compiler_type], +[if test -z "AMDEP_TRUE" && test -f "am_depcomp"; then + # We make a subdir and do the tests there. Otherwise we can end up + # making bogus files that we don't know about and never remove. For + # instance it was reported that on HP-UX the gcc test will end up + # making a dummy file named D' -- because -MD' means put the output + # in D'. + mkdir conftest.dir + # Copy depcomp to subdir because otherwise we won't find it if we're + # using a relative directory. + cp "am_depcomp" conftest.dir + cd conftest.dir + # We will build objects and dependencies in a subdirectory because + # it helps to detect inapplicable dependency modes. For instance + # both Tru64's cc and ICC support -MD to output dependencies as a + # side effect of compilation, but ICC will put the dependencies in + # the current directory while Tru64 will put them in the object + # directory. + mkdir sub + + am_cv_1_dependencies_compiler_type=none + if test "am_compiler_list" = ""; then + am_compiler_list=sed -n ['s/^#*$$[a-zA-Z0-9]*$$)/\1/p'] < ./depcomp + fi + for depmode in am_compiler_list; do + # Setup a source with many dependencies, because some compilers + # like to wrap large dependency lists on column 80 (with \), and + # we should not choose a depcomp mode which is confused by this. + # + # We need to recreate these files for each test, as the compiler may + # overwrite some of them when testing with obscure command lines. + # This happens at least with the AIX C compiler. + : > sub/conftest.c + for i in 1 2 3 4 5 6; do + echo '#include "conftst'i'.h"' >> sub/conftest.c + # Using : > sub/conftsti.h' creates only sub/conftst1.h with + # Solaris 8's {/usr,}/bin/sh. + touch sub/conftsti.h + done + echo "{am__include} {am__quote}sub/conftest.Po{am__quote}" > confmf + + case depmode in + nosideeffect) + # after this tag, mechanisms are not by side-effect, so they'll + # only be used when explicitly requested + if test "xenable_dependency_tracking" = xyes; then + continue + else + break + fi + ;; + none) break ;; + esac + # We check with -c' and -o' for the sake of the "dashmstdout" + # mode. It turns out that the SunPro C++ compiler does not properly + # handle -M -o', and we need to detect this. + if depmode=depmode \ + source=sub/conftest.c object=sub/conftest.{OBJEXT-o} \ + depfile=sub/conftest.Po tmpdepfile=sub/conftest.TPo \ + SHELL ./depcomp depcc -c -o sub/conftest.{OBJEXT-o} sub/conftest.c \ + >/dev/null 2>conftest.err && + grep sub/conftst6.h sub/conftest.Po > /dev/null 2>&1 && + grep sub/conftest.{OBJEXT-o} sub/conftest.Po > /dev/null 2>&1 && + {MAKE-make} -s -f confmf > /dev/null 2>&1; then + # icc doesn't choke on unknown options, it will just issue warnings + # or remarks (even with -Werror). So we grep stderr for any message + # that says an option was ignored or not supported. + # When given -MP, icc 7.0 and 7.1 complain thusly: + # icc: Command line warning: ignoring option '-M'; no argument required + # The diagnosis changed in icc 8.0: + # icc: Command line remark: option '-MP' not supported + if (grep 'ignoring option' conftest.err || + grep 'not supported' conftest.err) >/dev/null 2>&1; then :; else + am_cv_1_dependencies_compiler_type=depmode + break + fi + fi + done + + cd .. + rm -rf conftest.dir +else + am_cv_1_dependencies_compiler_type=none +fi +]) +AC_SUBST([1DEPMODE], [depmode=am_cv_1_dependencies_compiler_type]) +AM_CONDITIONAL([am__fastdep1], [ + test "xenable_dependency_tracking" != xno \ + && test "am_cv_1_dependencies_compiler_type" = gcc3]) +]) + + +# AM_SET_DEPDIR +# ------------- +# Choose a directory name for dependency files. +# This macro is AC_REQUIREd in _AM_DEPENDENCIES +AC_DEFUN([AM_SET_DEPDIR], +[AC_REQUIRE([AM_SET_LEADING_DOT])dnl +AC_SUBST([DEPDIR], ["{am__leading_dot}deps"])dnl +]) + + +# AM_DEP_TRACK +# ------------ +AC_DEFUN([AM_DEP_TRACK], +[AC_ARG_ENABLE(dependency-tracking, +[ --disable-dependency-tracking speeds up one-time build + --enable-dependency-tracking do not reject slow dependency extractors]) +if test "xenable_dependency_tracking" != xno; then + am_depcomp="ac_aux_dir/depcomp" + AMDEPBACKSLASH='\' +fi +AM_CONDITIONAL([AMDEP], [test "xenable_dependency_tracking" != xno]) +AC_SUBST([AMDEPBACKSLASH]) +]) + +# Generate code to set up dependency tracking. -*- Autoconf -*- + +# Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 +# Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +#serial 3 + +# _AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS +# ------------------------------ +AC_DEFUN([_AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS], +[for mf in CONFIG_FILES; do + # Strip MF so we end up with the name of the file. + mf=echo "mf" | sed -e 's/:.*//' + # Check whether this is an Automake generated Makefile or not. + # We used to match only the files named Makefile.in', but + # some people rename them; so instead we look at the file content. + # Grep'ing the first line is not enough: some people post-process + # each Makefile.in and add a new line on top of each file to say so. + # So let's grep whole file. + if grep '^#.*generated by automake' mf > /dev/null 2>&1; then + dirpart=AS_DIRNAME("mf") + else + continue + fi + # Extract the definition of DEPDIR, am__include, and am__quote + # from the Makefile without running make'. + DEPDIR=sed -n 's/^DEPDIR = //p' < "mf" + test -z "DEPDIR" && continue + am__include=sed -n 's/^am__include = //p' < "mf" + test -z "am__include" && continue + am__quote=sed -n 's/^am__quote = //p' < "mf" + # When using ansi2knr, U may be empty or an underscore; expand it + U=sed -n 's/^U = //p' < "mf" + # Find all dependency output files, they are included files with + # (DEPDIR) in their names. We invoke sed twice because it is the + # simplest approach to changing (DEPDIR) to its actual value in the + # expansion. + for file in sed -n " + s/^am__include am__quote$$.*(DEPDIR).*$$am__quote"'/\1/p' <"mf" | \ + sed -e 's/\(DEPDIR)/'"DEPDIR"'/g' -e 's/\U/'"U"'/g'; do + # Make sure the directory exists. + test -f "dirpart/file" && continue + fdir=AS_DIRNAME(["file"]) + AS_MKDIR_P([dirpart/fdir]) + # echo "creating dirpart/file" + echo '# dummy' > "dirpart/file" + done +done +])# _AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS + + +# AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS +# ----------------------------- +# This macro should only be invoked once -- use via AC_REQUIRE. +# +# This code is only required when automatic dependency tracking +# is enabled. FIXME. This creates each .P' file that we will +# need in order to bootstrap the dependency handling code. +AC_DEFUN([AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS], +[AC_CONFIG_COMMANDS([depfiles], + [test x"AMDEP_TRUE" != x"" || _AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS], + [AMDEP_TRUE="AMDEP_TRUE" ac_aux_dir="ac_aux_dir"]) +]) + +# Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2005 +# Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# serial 8 + +# AM_CONFIG_HEADER is obsolete. It has been replaced by AC_CONFIG_HEADERS. +AU_DEFUN([AM_CONFIG_HEADER], [AC_CONFIG_HEADERS(@)]) + +# Do all the work for Automake. -*- Autoconf -*- + +# Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 +# Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# serial 12 + +# This macro actually does too much. Some checks are only needed if +# your package does certain things. But this isn't really a big deal. + +# AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(PACKAGE, VERSION, [NO-DEFINE]) +# AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE([OPTIONS]) +# ----------------------------------------------- +# The call with PACKAGE and VERSION arguments is the old style +# call (pre autoconf-2.50), which is being phased out. PACKAGE +# and VERSION should now be passed to AC_INIT and removed from +# the call to AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE. +# We support both call styles for the transition. After +# the next Automake release, Autoconf can make the AC_INIT +# arguments mandatory, and then we can depend on a new Autoconf +# release and drop the old call support. +AC_DEFUN([AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE], +[AC_PREREQ([2.58])dnl +dnl Autoconf wants to disallow AM_ names. We explicitly allow +dnl the ones we care about. +m4_pattern_allow([^AM_[A-Z]+FLAGS])dnl +AC_REQUIRE([AM_SET_CURRENT_AUTOMAKE_VERSION])dnl +AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_INSTALL])dnl +# test to see if srcdir already configured +if test "cd srcdir && pwd" != "pwd" && + test -f srcdir/config.status; then + AC_MSG_ERROR([source directory already configured; run "make distclean" there first]) +fi + +# test whether we have cygpath +if test -z "CYGPATH_W"; then + if (cygpath --version) >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then + CYGPATH_W='cygpath -w' + else + CYGPATH_W=echo + fi +fi +AC_SUBST([CYGPATH_W]) + +# Define the identity of the package. +dnl Distinguish between old-style and new-style calls. +m4_ifval([2], +[m4_ifval([3], [_AM_SET_OPTION([no-define])])dnl + AC_SUBST([PACKAGE], [1])dnl + AC_SUBST([VERSION], [2])], +[_AM_SET_OPTIONS([1])dnl + AC_SUBST([PACKAGE], ['AC_PACKAGE_TARNAME'])dnl + AC_SUBST([VERSION], ['AC_PACKAGE_VERSION'])])dnl + +_AM_IF_OPTION([no-define],, +[AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(PACKAGE, "PACKAGE", [Name of package]) + AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(VERSION, "VERSION", [Version number of package])])dnl + +# Some tools Automake needs. +AC_REQUIRE([AM_SANITY_CHECK])dnl +AC_REQUIRE([AC_ARG_PROGRAM])dnl +AM_MISSING_PROG(ACLOCAL, aclocal-{am__api_version}) +AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOCONF, autoconf) +AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOMAKE, automake-{am__api_version}) +AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOHEADER, autoheader) +AM_MISSING_PROG(MAKEINFO, makeinfo) +AM_PROG_INSTALL_SH +AM_PROG_INSTALL_STRIP +AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_MKDIR_P])dnl +# We need awk for the "check" target. The system "awk" is bad on +# some platforms. +AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_AWK])dnl +AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_MAKE_SET])dnl +AC_REQUIRE([AM_SET_LEADING_DOT])dnl +_AM_IF_OPTION([tar-ustar], [_AM_PROG_TAR([ustar])], + [_AM_IF_OPTION([tar-pax], [_AM_PROG_TAR([pax])], + [_AM_PROG_TAR([v7])])]) +_AM_IF_OPTION([no-dependencies],, +[AC_PROVIDE_IFELSE([AC_PROG_CC], + [_AM_DEPENDENCIES(CC)], + [define([AC_PROG_CC], + defn([AC_PROG_CC])[_AM_DEPENDENCIES(CC)])])dnl +AC_PROVIDE_IFELSE([AC_PROG_CXX], + [_AM_DEPENDENCIES(CXX)], + [define([AC_PROG_CXX], + defn([AC_PROG_CXX])[_AM_DEPENDENCIES(CXX)])])dnl +]) +]) + + +# When config.status generates a header, we must update the stamp-h file. +# This file resides in the same directory as the config header +# that is generated. The stamp files are numbered to have different names. + +# Autoconf calls _AC_AM_CONFIG_HEADER_HOOK (when defined) in the +# loop where config.status creates the headers, so we can generate +# our stamp files there. +AC_DEFUN([_AC_AM_CONFIG_HEADER_HOOK], +[# Compute 1's index in config_headers. +_am_stamp_count=1 +for _am_header in config_headers :; do + case _am_header in + 1 | 1:* ) + break ;; + * ) + _am_stamp_count=expr _am_stamp_count + 1 ;; + esac +done +echo "timestamp for 1" >AS_DIRNAME([1])/stamp-h[]_am_stamp_count]) + +# Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# AM_PROG_INSTALL_SH +# ------------------ +# Define install_sh. +AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_INSTALL_SH], +[AC_REQUIRE([AM_AUX_DIR_EXPAND])dnl +install_sh={install_sh-"am_aux_dir/install-sh"} +AC_SUBST(install_sh)]) + +# Copyright (C) 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# serial 2 + +# Check whether the underlying file-system supports filenames +# with a leading dot. For instance MS-DOS doesn't. +AC_DEFUN([AM_SET_LEADING_DOT], +[rm -rf .tst 2>/dev/null +mkdir .tst 2>/dev/null +if test -d .tst; then + am__leading_dot=. +else + am__leading_dot=_ +fi +rmdir .tst 2>/dev/null +AC_SUBST([am__leading_dot])]) + +# Check to see how 'make' treats includes. -*- Autoconf -*- + +# Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# serial 3 + +# AM_MAKE_INCLUDE() +# ----------------- +# Check to see how make treats includes. +AC_DEFUN([AM_MAKE_INCLUDE], +[am_make={MAKE-make} +cat > confinc << 'END' +am__doit: + @echo done +.PHONY: am__doit +END +# If we don't find an include directive, just comment out the code. +AC_MSG_CHECKING([for style of include used by am_make]) +am__include="#" +am__quote= +_am_result=none +# First try GNU make style include. +echo "include confinc" > confmf +# We grep out Entering directory' and Leaving directory' +# messages which can occur if w' ends up in MAKEFLAGS. +# In particular we don't look at ^make:' because GNU make might +# be invoked under some other name (usually "gmake"), in which +# case it prints its new name instead of make'. +if test "am_make -s -f confmf 2> /dev/null | grep -v 'ing directory'" = "done"; then + am__include=include + am__quote= + _am_result=GNU +fi +# Now try BSD make style include. +if test "am__include" = "#"; then + echo '.include "confinc"' > confmf + if test "am_make -s -f confmf 2> /dev/null" = "done"; then + am__include=.include + am__quote="\"" + _am_result=BSD + fi +fi +AC_SUBST([am__include]) +AC_SUBST([am__quote]) +AC_MSG_RESULT([_am_result]) +rm -f confinc confmf +]) + +# Fake the existence of programs that GNU maintainers use. -*- Autoconf -*- + +# Copyright (C) 1997, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2005 +# Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# serial 4 + +# AM_MISSING_PROG(NAME, PROGRAM) +# ------------------------------ +AC_DEFUN([AM_MISSING_PROG], +[AC_REQUIRE([AM_MISSING_HAS_RUN]) +1={1-"{am_missing_run}2"} +AC_SUBST(1)]) + + +# AM_MISSING_HAS_RUN +# ------------------ +# Define MISSING if not defined so far and test if it supports --run. +# If it does, set am_missing_run to use it, otherwise, to nothing. +AC_DEFUN([AM_MISSING_HAS_RUN], +[AC_REQUIRE([AM_AUX_DIR_EXPAND])dnl +test x"{MISSING+set}" = xset || MISSING="\{SHELL} am_aux_dir/missing" +# Use eval to expand SHELL +if eval "MISSING --run true"; then + am_missing_run="MISSING --run " +else + am_missing_run= + AC_MSG_WARN([missing' script is too old or missing]) +fi +]) + +# Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# AM_PROG_MKDIR_P +# --------------- +# Check whether mkdir -p' is supported, fallback to mkinstalldirs otherwise. +# +# Automake 1.8 used mkdir -m 0755 -p --' to ensure that directories +# created by make install' are always world readable, even if the +# installer happens to have an overly restrictive umask (e.g. 077). +# This was a mistake. There are at least two reasons why we must not +# use -m 0755': +# - it causes special bits like SGID to be ignored, +# - it may be too restrictive (some setups expect 775 directories). +# +# Do not use -m 0755 and let people choose whatever they expect by +# setting umask. +# +# We cannot accept any implementation of mkdir' that recognizes -p'. +# Some implementations (such as Solaris 8's) are not thread-safe: if a +# parallel make tries to run mkdir -p a/b' and mkdir -p a/c' +# concurrently, both version can detect that a/ is missing, but only +# one can create it and the other will error out. Consequently we +# restrict ourselves to GNU make (using the --version option ensures +# this.) +AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_MKDIR_P], +[if mkdir -p --version . >/dev/null 2>&1 && test ! -d ./--version; then + # We used to keeping the .' as first argument, in order to + # allow (mkdir_p) to be used without argument. As in + # (mkdir_p) (somedir) + # where (somedir) is conditionally defined. However this is wrong + # for two reasons: + # 1. if the package is installed by a user who cannot write .' + # make install will fail, + # 2. the above comment should most certainly read + # (mkdir_p) (DESTDIR)(somedir) + # so it does not work when (somedir) is undefined and + # (DESTDIR) is not. + # To support the latter case, we have to write + # test -z "(somedir)" || (mkdir_p) (DESTDIR)(somedir), + # so the .' trick is pointless. + mkdir_p='mkdir -p --' +else + # On NextStep and OpenStep, the mkdir' command does not + # recognize any option. It will interpret all options as + # directories to create, and then abort because .' already + # exists. + for d in ./-p ./--version; + do + test -d d && rmdir d + done + # (mkinstalldirs) is defined by Automake if mkinstalldirs exists. + if test -f "ac_aux_dir/mkinstalldirs"; then + mkdir_p='(mkinstalldirs)' + else + mkdir_p='(install_sh) -d' + fi +fi +AC_SUBST([mkdir_p])]) + +# Helper functions for option handling. -*- Autoconf -*- + +# Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# serial 3 + +# _AM_MANGLE_OPTION(NAME) +# ----------------------- +AC_DEFUN([_AM_MANGLE_OPTION], +[[_AM_OPTION_]m4_bpatsubst(1, [[^a-zA-Z0-9_]], [_])]) + +# _AM_SET_OPTION(NAME) +# ------------------------------ +# Set option NAME. Presently that only means defining a flag for this option. +AC_DEFUN([_AM_SET_OPTION], +[m4_define(_AM_MANGLE_OPTION([1]), 1)]) + +# _AM_SET_OPTIONS(OPTIONS) +# ---------------------------------- +# OPTIONS is a space-separated list of Automake options. +AC_DEFUN([_AM_SET_OPTIONS], +[AC_FOREACH([_AM_Option], [1], [_AM_SET_OPTION(_AM_Option)])]) + +# _AM_IF_OPTION(OPTION, IF-SET, [IF-NOT-SET]) +# ------------------------------------------- +# Execute IF-SET if OPTION is set, IF-NOT-SET otherwise. +AC_DEFUN([_AM_IF_OPTION], +[m4_ifset(_AM_MANGLE_OPTION([1]), [2], [3])]) + +# Check to make sure that the build environment is sane. -*- Autoconf -*- + +# Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2005 +# Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# serial 4 + +# AM_SANITY_CHECK +# --------------- +AC_DEFUN([AM_SANITY_CHECK], +[AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether build environment is sane]) +# Just in case +sleep 1 +echo timestamp > conftest.file +# Do set' in a subshell so we don't clobber the current shell's +# arguments. Must try -L first in case configure is actually a +# symlink; some systems play weird games with the mod time of symlinks +# (eg FreeBSD returns the mod time of the symlink's containing +# directory). +if ( + set X ls -Lt srcdir/configure conftest.file 2> /dev/null + if test "[*]" = "X"; then + # -L didn't work. + set X ls -t srcdir/configure conftest.file + fi + rm -f conftest.file + if test "[*]" != "X srcdir/configure conftest.file" \ + && test "[*]" != "X conftest.file srcdir/configure"; then + + # If neither matched, then we have a broken ls. This can happen + # if, for instance, CONFIG_SHELL is bash and it inherits a + # broken ls alias from the environment. This has actually + # happened. Such a system could not be considered "sane". + AC_MSG_ERROR([ls -t appears to fail. Make sure there is not a broken +alias in your environment]) + fi + + test "[2]" = conftest.file + ) +then + # Ok. + : +else + AC_MSG_ERROR([newly created file is older than distributed files! +Check your system clock]) +fi +AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)]) + +# Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# AM_PROG_INSTALL_STRIP +# --------------------- +# One issue with vendor install' (even GNU) is that you can't +# specify the program used to strip binaries. This is especially +# annoying in cross-compiling environments, where the build's strip +# is unlikely to handle the host's binaries. +# Fortunately install-sh will honor a STRIPPROG variable, so we +# always use install-sh in make install-strip', and initialize +# STRIPPROG with the value of the STRIP variable (set by the user). +AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_INSTALL_STRIP], +[AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_INSTALL_SH])dnl +# Installed binaries are usually stripped using strip' when the user +# run make install-strip'. However strip' might not be the right +# tool to use in cross-compilation environments, therefore Automake +# will honor the STRIP' environment variable to overrule this program. +dnl Don't test for cross_compiling = yes, because it might be maybe'. +if test "cross_compiling" != no; then + AC_CHECK_TOOL([STRIP], [strip], :) +fi +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM="\{SHELL} \(install_sh) -c -s" +AC_SUBST([INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM])]) + +# Check how to create a tarball. -*- Autoconf -*- + +# Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# serial 2 + +# _AM_PROG_TAR(FORMAT) +# -------------------- +# Check how to create a tarball in format FORMAT. +# FORMAT should be one of v7', ustar', or pax'. +# +# Substitute a variable (am__tar) that is a command +# writing to stdout a FORMAT-tarball containing the directory +# tardir. +# tardir=directory && (am__tar) > result.tar +# +# Substitute a variable (am__untar) that extract such +# a tarball read from stdin. +# (am__untar) < result.tar +AC_DEFUN([_AM_PROG_TAR], +[# Always define AMTAR for backward compatibility. +AM_MISSING_PROG([AMTAR], [tar]) +m4_if([1], [v7], + [am__tar='{AMTAR} chof - "$$tardir"'; am__untar='${AMTAR} xf -'],
+     [m4_case([$1], [ustar],, [pax],, + [m4_fatal([Unknown tar format])]) +AC_MSG_CHECKING([how to create a$1 tar archive])
+# Loop over all known methods to create a tar archive until one works.
+_am_tools='gnutar m4_if([$1], [ustar], [plaintar]) pax cpio none' +_am_tools=${am_cv_prog_tar_$1-$_am_tools}
+# Do not fold the above two line into one, because Tru64 sh and
+# Solaris sh will not grok spaces in the rhs of -'.
+for _am_tool in $_am_tools +do + case$_am_tool in
+  gnutar)
+    for _am_tar in tar gnutar gtar;
+    do
+      AM_RUN_LOG([$_am_tar --version]) && break + done + am__tar="$_am_tar --format=m4_if([$1], [pax], [posix], [$1]) -chf -
"'"$$tardir"' + am__tar_="_am_tar --format=m4_if([1], [pax], [posix], [1]) -chf - "'"tardir"' + am__untar="_am_tar -xf -" + ;; + plaintar) + # Must skip GNU tar: if it does not support --format= it doesn't create + # ustar tarball either. + (tar --version) >/dev/null 2>&1 && continue + am__tar='tar chf - "$$tardir"'
+    am__tar_='tar chf - "$tardir"' + am__untar='tar xf -' + ;; + pax) + am__tar='pax -L -x$1 -w "$$tardir"' + am__tar_='pax -L -x 1 -w "tardir"' + am__untar='pax -r' + ;; + cpio) + am__tar='find "$$tardir" -print | cpio -o -H $1 -L' + am__tar_='find "$tardir" -print | cpio -o -H $1 -L' + am__untar='cpio -i -H$1 -d'
+    ;;
+  none)
+    am__tar=false
+    am__tar_=false
+    am__untar=false
+    ;;
+  esac
+
+  # If the value was cached, stop now.  We just wanted to have am__tar
+  # and am__untar set.
+  test -n "${am_cv_prog_tar_$1}" && break
+
+  # tar/untar a dummy directory, and stop if the command works
+  rm -rf conftest.dir
+  mkdir conftest.dir
+  echo GrepMe > conftest.dir/file
+  AM_RUN_LOG([tardir=conftest.dir && eval $am__tar_ >conftest.tar]) + rm -rf conftest.dir + if test -s conftest.tar; then + AM_RUN_LOG([$am__untar <conftest.tar])
+    grep GrepMe conftest.dir/file >/dev/null 2>&1 && break
+  fi
+done
+rm -rf conftest.dir
+
+AC_CACHE_VAL([am_cv_prog_tar_$1], [am_cv_prog_tar_$1=$_am_tool]) +AC_MSG_RESULT([$am_cv_prog_tar_$1])]) +AC_SUBST([am__tar]) +AC_SUBST([am__untar]) +]) # _AM_PROG_TAR + +m4_include([acinclude.m4]) Added: branches/flightrecorder/configure.in =================================================================== --- branches/flightrecorder/configure.in (rev 0) +++ branches/flightrecorder/configure.in 2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724) @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +dnl Process this file with autoconf to produce a configure script. + +AC_INIT(flightrecorder.c) +dnl Every other copy of the package version number gets its value from here +AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(flightrecorder, 0.1.0) + +dnl create a config.h file (Automake will add -DHAVE_CONFIG_H) +AM_CONFIG_HEADER(config.h) + +AC_SUBST(VERSION) + +ISODATE=date +%Y-%m-%d +AC_SUBST(ISODATE) + +AC_CANONICAL_HOST + +dnl Checks for programs. +AC_PROG_INSTALL +AC_PROG_CC + +dnl Checks for libraries. + +dnl Checks for header files. +AC_HEADER_STDC +AC_CHECK_HEADERS(unistd.h sys/param.h sys/time.h time.h sys/mkdev.h sys/sysmacros.h string.h memory.h fcntl.h dirent.h sys/ndir.h ndir.h alloca.h locale.h ) + + +jm_CHECK_TYPE_STRUCT_UTIMBUF +AC_HEADER_MAJOR +AC_FUNC_ALLOCA +AC_STRUCT_TM +AC_STRUCT_ST_BLOCKS +AC_FUNC_CLOSEDIR_VOID +AC_CHECK_FUNCS(mkfifo) +AC_CHECK_FUNC(mknod) + +dnl Checks for typedefs, structures, and compiler characteristics. + +dnl Checks for library functions. + +AC_OUTPUT(Makefile flightrecorder.lsm flightrecorder.spec) Added: branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.1 =================================================================== --- branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.1 (rev 0) +++ branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.1 2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724) @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +.\" hey, Emacs: -*- nroff -*- +.\" flightrecorder is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +.\" (at your option) any later version. +.\" +.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +.\" GNU General Public License for more details. +.\" +.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +.\" along with this program; see the file COPYING. If not, write to +.\" the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. +.\" +.TH FLIGHTRECORDER 1 "November 1, 2007" +.\" Please update the above date whenever this man page is modified. +.\" +.\" Some roff macros, for reference: +.\" .nh disable hyphenation +.\" .hy enable hyphenation +.\" .ad l left justify +.\" .ad b justify to both left and right margins (default) +.\" .nf disable filling +.\" .fi enable filling +.\" .br insert line break +.\" .sp <n> insert n+1 empty lines +.\" for manpage-specific macros, see man(7) +.SH NAME +flightrecorder \- A recorder for runtime information gathered by AOP advices or other process internal checks +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B flightrecorder +.RI [ options ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +\fBflightrecorder\fP washes your windows, mends your fences, mows your lawn... +.PP +It also... +.SH OPTIONS +\fBflightrecorder\fP accepts the following options: +.TP +.B \-h, \-\-help +Show summary of options. +.TP +.B \-V, \-\-version +Show version of program. +.\" .SH "SEE ALSO" +.\" .BR foo (1), +.\" .BR bar (1). +.SH AUTHOR +Nils Durner <address@hidden>. Added: branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.lsm.in =================================================================== --- branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.lsm.in (rev 0) +++ branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.lsm.in 2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724) @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +Begin3 +Title: flightrecorder +Version: @VERSION@ +Entered-date: @ISODATE@ +Description: A recorder for runtime information gathered by AOP advices or other process internal checks + @configure_input@ + Please edit flightrecorder.lsm.in to fix the Keywords and + Primary-site entries, add several more lines of + description here if appropriate, and to delete these + instructions. +Keywords: [substitute your keywords here] +Author: address@hidden (Nils Durner) +Maintained-by: address@hidden (Nils Durner) +Primary-site: metlab.unc.edu pub/Linux/apps/some/directory + 31k address@hidden@.tar.gz + 500 flightrecorder.lsm +Alternate-site: +Original-site: +Platforms: +Copying-policy: GNU copyleft +End Added: branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.spec.in =================================================================== --- branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.spec.in (rev 0) +++ branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.spec.in 2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724) @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +# flightrecorder.spec +# +# Copyright (c) 2007 Nils Durner address@hidden +# +%define name flightrecorder +%define version @VERSION@ +%define release 1 +%define manifest %{_builddir}/%{name}-%{version}-%{release}.manifest + +# required items +Name: %{name} +Version: %{version} +Release: %{release} +Copyright: GPL +Group: Application/Misc + +# optional items +#Vendor: Nils Durner +#Distribution: +#Icon: +#URL: +#Packager: Nils Durner address@hidden + +# source + patches +Source: %{name}-%{version}.tar.gz +#Source1: +#Patch: +#Patch1: + +# RPM info +#Provides: +#Requires: +#Conflicts: +#Prereq: + +#Prefix: /usr +BuildRoot: /var/tmp/%{name}-%{version} + +Summary: A recorder for runtime information gathered by AOP advices or other process internal checks + +%description +A recorder for runtime information gathered by AOP advices or other process internal checks address@hidden@ +Please edit flightrecorder.spec.in to add several more lines of description +here if appropriate, and to delete these instructions. + +%prep +%setup -q +#%patch0 -p1 + +%build +%configure +make + +%install +rm -rf$RPM_BUILD_ROOT
+mkdir -p $RPM_BUILD_ROOT +%makeinstall + +# __os_install_post is implicitly expanded after the +# %install section... do it now, and then disable it, +# so all work is done before building manifest. + +%{?__os_install_post} +%define __os_install_post %{nil} + +# build the file list automagically into %{manifest} + +cd$RPM_BUILD_ROOT
+rm -f %{manifest}
+find . -type d \
+        | sed '1,2d;s,^\.,\%attr(-\,root\,root) \%dir ,' >> %{manifest}
+find . -type f \
+        | sed 's,^\.,\%attr(-\,root\,root) ,' >> %{manifest}
+find . -type l \
+        | sed 's,^\.,\%attr(-\,root\,root) ,' >> %{manifest}
+
+#%pre
+#%post
+#%preun
+#%postun
+
+%clean
+rm -f %{manifest}
+rm -rf $RPM_BUILD_ROOT + +%files -f %{manifest} +%defattr(-,root,root) +#%doc README +#%docdir +#%config + +%changelog Added: branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.texinfo =================================================================== --- branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.texinfo (rev 0) +++ branches/flightrecorder/flightrecorder.texinfo 2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724) @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ +\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- address@hidden This file uses the @command command introduced in Texinfo 4.0. address@hidden %**start of header address@hidden flightrecorder.info address@hidden A recorder for runtime information gathered by AOP advices or other process internal checks address@hidden address@hidden odd address@hidden %**end of header + address@hidden VERSION 0.1.0 + address@hidden +This file documents the @command{flightrecorder} command which A recorder for runtime information gathered by AOP advices or other process internal checks + +Copyright (C) 2007 Nils Durner + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of +this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice +are preserved on all copies. + address@hidden +Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the +results, provided the printed document carries copying permission +notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph +(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual). + address@hidden ignore +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire +resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission +notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, +except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved +by the Foundation. address@hidden ifinfo + address@hidden address@hidden flightrecorder address@hidden A recorder for runtime information gathered by AOP advices or other process internal checks address@hidden for flightrecorder Version @value{VERSION} address@hidden by Nils Durner + address@hidden address@hidden 0pt plus 1filll +Copyright @copyright{} 2007 Nils Durner + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of +this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice +are preserved on all copies. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire +resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission +notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, +except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved +by the Foundation. address@hidden titlepage + address@hidden All the nodes can be updated using the EMACS command address@hidden texinfo-every-node-update, which is normally bound to C-c C-u C-e. address@hidden Top, Instructions, (dir), (dir) + address@hidden +This file documents the @command{flightrecorder} command to A recorder for runtime information gathered by AOP advices or other process internal checks. address@hidden ifinfo + address@hidden All the menus can be updated with the EMACS command address@hidden texinfo-all-menus-update, which is normally bound to C-c C-u C-a. address@hidden +* Instructions:: How to read this manual. +* Copying:: How you can copy and share @command{flightrecorder}. +* Overview:: Preliminary information. +* Sample:: Sample output from @command{flightrecorder}. +* Invoking flightrecorder:: How to run @command{flightrecorder}. +* Problems:: Reporting bugs. +* Concept Index:: Index of concepts. address@hidden menu + address@hidden Instructions, Copying, Top, Top address@hidden How to Read This Manual + address@hidden reading address@hidden manual, how to read address@hidden how to read +To read this manual, begin at the beginning, reading from left to right +and top to bottom, until you get to the end. Then stop. You may pause +for a beer anywhere in the middle as well, if you wish. (Please note, +however, that The King strongly advises against heavy use of +prescription pharmaceuticals, based on his extensive personal and +professional experience.) + address@hidden Copying, Overview, Instructions, Top address@hidden gpl.texinfo + address@hidden Overview, Sample, Copying, Top address@hidden Overview address@hidden greetings address@hidden overview + +The GNU @command{flightrecorder} program produces a familiar, friendly greeting. +It allows nonprogrammers to use a classic computer science tool which +would otherwise be unavailable to them. Because it is protected by the +GNU General Public License, users are free to share and change it. + +GNU @command{flightrecorder} was written by Nils Durner. + address@hidden Sample, Invoking flightrecorder, Overview, Top address@hidden Sample Output address@hidden sample + +Here are some realistic examples of running @command{flightrecorder}. + +This is the output of the command @samp{flightrecorder}: + address@hidden +hello, world! address@hidden example + +This is the output of the command @samp{flightrecorder --help}: + address@hidden +Usage: flightrecorder [OPTION...] [FILE...] +A recorder for runtime information gathered by AOP advices or other process internal checks + + -?, --help Give this help list + --usage Give a short usage message + -V, --version Print program version + +Report bugs to <ndurner@@web.de>. address@hidden example + address@hidden Invoking flightrecorder, Problems, Sample, Top address@hidden Invoking @command{flightrecorder} address@hidden invoking address@hidden version address@hidden options address@hidden usage address@hidden help address@hidden getting help + +The format for running the @command{flightrecorder} program is: + address@hidden +flightrecorder @var{option} @dots{} address@hidden example + address@hidden supports the following options: + address@hidden Formatting copied from the Texinfo 4.0 manual. address@hidden @code address@hidden --help address@hidden -? +Print an informative help message describing the options and then exit +successfully. + address@hidden --usage +Briefly list the options. + address@hidden --version address@hidden -V +Print the version number of @command{flightrecorder} on the standard output +and then exit successfully. address@hidden table + address@hidden Problems, Concept Index, Invoking flightrecorder, Top address@hidden Reporting Bugs address@hidden bugs address@hidden problems + +If you find a bug in @command{flightrecorder}, please send electronic mail to address@hidden@@web.de}. Include the version number, which you can find by +running @address@hidden --version}}. Also include in your message the +output that the program produced and the output you address@hidden + +If you have other questions, comments or suggestions about address@hidden, contact the author via electronic mail to address@hidden@@web.de}. The author will try to help you out, although he +may not have time to fix your problems. + address@hidden Concept Index, , Problems, Top address@hidden Concept Index + address@hidden tail recursion address@hidden cp + address@hidden address@hidden address@hidden Added: branches/flightrecorder/gpl.texinfo =================================================================== --- branches/flightrecorder/gpl.texinfo (rev 0) +++ branches/flightrecorder/gpl.texinfo 2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724) @@ -0,0 +1,396 @@ address@hidden gpl.info + address@hidden GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE address@hidden Version 2, June 1991 + address@hidden +Copyright @copyright{} 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA + +Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies +of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. address@hidden display + address@hidden Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software---to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + address@hidden address@hidden TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION address@hidden iftex address@hidden address@hidden TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION address@hidden ifinfo + address@hidden address@hidden +This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The Program'', below, +refers to any such program or work, and a work based on the Program'' +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term modification''.) Each licensee is addressed as you''. + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + address@hidden +You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + address@hidden +You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + address@hidden a address@hidden +You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices +stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + address@hidden +You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in +whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any +part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third +parties under the terms of this License. + address@hidden +If the modified program normally reads commands interactively +when run, you must cause it, when started running for such +interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an +announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a +notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide +a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under +these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this +License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but +does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on +the Program is not required to print an announcement.) address@hidden enumerate + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + address@hidden +You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + address@hidden a address@hidden +Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable +source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections +1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + address@hidden +Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three +years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your +cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete +machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be +distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium +customarily used for software interchange; or, + address@hidden +Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer +to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is +allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you +received the program in object code or executable form with such +an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) address@hidden enumerate + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + address@hidden +You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + address@hidden +You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + address@hidden +Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + address@hidden +If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + address@hidden +If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + address@hidden +The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any +later version'', you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + address@hidden +If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + address@hidden address@hidden NO WARRANTY address@hidden iftex address@hidden address@hidden NO WARRANTY address@hidden ifinfo + address@hidden +BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS'' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + address@hidden +IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. address@hidden enumerate + address@hidden address@hidden END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS address@hidden iftex address@hidden address@hidden END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS address@hidden ifinfo + address@hidden address@hidden How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it +free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest +to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least +the copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + address@hidden address@hidden line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.} +Copyright (C) @var{year} @var{name of author} + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License +as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 +of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +GNU General Public License for more details. + +You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA address@hidden smallexample + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + +If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this +when it starts in an interactive mode: + address@hidden +Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) @var{year} @var{name of author} +Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details +type show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome +to redistribute it under certain conditions; type show c' +for details. address@hidden smallexample + +The hypothetical commands @samp{show w} and @samp{show c} should show +the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the +commands you use may be called something other than @samp{show w} and address@hidden c}; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items---whatever +suits your program. + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your +school, if any, to sign a copyright disclaimer'' for the program, if +necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: + address@hidden address@hidden +Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright +interest in the program Gnomovision' +(which makes passes at compilers) written +by James Hacker. + address@hidden of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1989 +Ty Coon, President of Vice address@hidden group address@hidden smallexample + +This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into +proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may +consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the +library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General +Public License instead of this License. Added: branches/flightrecorder/install-sh =================================================================== --- branches/flightrecorder/install-sh (rev 0) +++ branches/flightrecorder/install-sh 2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724) @@ -0,0 +1,323 @@ +#!/bin/sh +# install - install a program, script, or datafile + +scriptversion=2005-05-14.22 + +# This originates from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh), which was +# later released in X11R6 (xc/config/util/install.sh) with the +# following copyright and license. +# +# Copyright (C) 1994 X Consortium +# +# Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy +# of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to +# deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the +# rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or +# sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is +# furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: +# +# The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in +# all copies or substantial portions of the Software. +# +# THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR +# IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, +# FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE +# X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN +# AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNEC- +# TION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. +# +# Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not +# be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal- +# ings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consor- +# tium. +# +# +# FSF changes to this file are in the public domain. +# +# Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent +# make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it +# when there is no Makefile. +# +# This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written +# from scratch. It can only install one file at a time, a restriction +# shared with many OS's install programs. + +# set DOITPROG to echo to test this script + +# Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it. +doit="${DOITPROG-}"
+
+# put in absolute paths if you don't have them in your path; or use env. vars.
+
+mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}" +cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}"
+chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}" +chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}"
+chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}" +stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}"
+rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}" +mkdirprog="${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}"
+
+chmodcmd="$chmodprog 0755" +chowncmd= +chgrpcmd= +stripcmd= +rmcmd="$rmprog -f"
+mvcmd="$mvprog" +src= +dst= +dir_arg= +dstarg= +no_target_directory= + +usage="Usage:$0 [OPTION]... [-T] SRCFILE DSTFILE
+   or: $0 [OPTION]... SRCFILES... DIRECTORY + or:$0 [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SRCFILES...
+   or: $0 [OPTION]... -d DIRECTORIES... + +In the 1st form, copy SRCFILE to DSTFILE. +In the 2nd and 3rd, copy all SRCFILES to DIRECTORY. +In the 4th, create DIRECTORIES. + +Options: +-c (ignored) +-d create directories instead of installing files. +-g GROUP$chgrpprog installed files to GROUP.
+-m MODE    $chmodprog installed files to MODE. +-o USER$chownprog installed files to USER.
+-s         $stripprog installed files. +-t DIRECTORY install into DIRECTORY. +-T report an error if DSTFILE is a directory. +--help display this help and exit. +--version display version info and exit. + +Environment variables override the default commands: + CHGRPPROG CHMODPROG CHOWNPROG CPPROG MKDIRPROG MVPROG RMPROG STRIPPROG +" + +while test -n "$1"; do
+  case $1 in + -c) shift + continue;; + + -d) dir_arg=true + shift + continue;; + + -g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2" + shift + shift + continue;; + + --help) echo "$usage"; exit $?;; + + -m) chmodcmd="$chmodprog $2" + shift + shift + continue;; + + -o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2" + shift + shift + continue;; + + -s) stripcmd=$stripprog
+        shift
+        continue;;
+
+    -t) dstarg=$2 + shift + shift + continue;; + + -T) no_target_directory=true + shift + continue;; + + --version) echo "$0 $scriptversion"; exit$?;;
+
+    *)  # When -d is used, all remaining arguments are directories to create.
+       # When -t is used, the destination is already specified.
+       test -n "$dir_arg$dstarg" && break
+        # Otherwise, the last argument is the destination.  Remove it from
+       for arg
+       do
+          if test -n "$dstarg"; then + #$@ is not empty: it contains at least $arg. + set fnord "$@" "$dstarg" + shift # fnord + fi + shift # arg + dstarg=$arg
+       done
+       break;;
+  esac
+done
+
+if test -z "$1"; then + if test -z "$dir_arg"; then
+    echo "$0: no input file specified." >&2 + exit 1 + fi + # It's OK to call install-sh -d' without argument. + # This can happen when creating conditional directories. + exit 0 +fi + +for src +do + # Protect names starting with -'. + case$src in
+    -*) src=./$src ;; + esac + + if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
+    dst=$src + src= + + if test -d "$dst"; then
+      mkdircmd=:
+      chmodcmd=
+    else
+      mkdircmd=$mkdirprog + fi + else + # Waiting for this to be detected by the "$cpprog $src$dsttmp" command
+    # might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad
+    # if $src (and thus$dsttmp) contains '*'.
+    if test ! -f "$src" && test ! -d "$src"; then
+      echo "$0:$src does not exist." >&2
+      exit 1
+    fi
+
+    if test -z "$dstarg"; then + echo "$0: no destination specified." >&2
+      exit 1
+    fi
+
+    dst=$dstarg + # Protect names starting with -'. + case$dst in
+      -*) dst=./$dst ;; + esac + + # If destination is a directory, append the input filename; won't work + # if double slashes aren't ignored. + if test -d "$dst"; then
+      if test -n "$no_target_directory"; then + echo "$0: $dstarg: Is a directory" >&2 + exit 1 + fi + dst=$dst/basename "$src" + fi + fi + + # This sed command emulates the dirname command. + dstdir=echo "$dst" | sed -e 's,/*$,,;s,[^/]*$,,;s,/*$,,;s,^$,.,'
+
+  # Make sure that the destination directory exists.
+
+  # Skip lots of stat calls in the usual case.
+  if test ! -d "$dstdir"; then + defaultIFS=' + ' + IFS="${IFS-$defaultIFS}" + + oIFS=$IFS
+    # Some sh's can't handle IFS=/ for some reason.
+    IFS='%'
+    set x echo "$dstdir" | sed -e 's@/@address@hidden' -e 'address@hidden@/@' + shift + IFS=$oIFS
+
+    pathcomp=
+
+    while test $# -ne 0 ; do + pathcomp=$pathcomp$1 + shift + if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then
+        $mkdirprog "$pathcomp"
+       # mkdir can fail with a File exist' error in case several
+       # install-sh are creating the directory concurrently.  This
+       # is OK.
+       test -d "$pathcomp" || exit + fi + pathcomp=$pathcomp/
+    done
+  fi
+
+  if test -n "$dir_arg"; then +$doit $mkdircmd "$dst" \
+      && { test -z "$chowncmd" ||$doit $chowncmd "$dst"; } \
+      && { test -z "$chgrpcmd" ||$doit $chgrpcmd "$dst"; } \
+      && { test -z "$stripcmd" ||$doit $stripcmd "$dst"; } \
+      && { test -z "$chmodcmd" ||$doit $chmodcmd "$dst"; }
+
+  else
+    dstfile=basename "$dst" + + # Make a couple of temp file names in the proper directory. + dsttmp=$dstdir/_inst.$$_ + rmtmp=dstdir/_rm.$$_
+
+    # Trap to clean up those temp files at exit.
+    trap 'ret=$?; rm -f "$dsttmp" "$rmtmp" && exit$ret' 0
+    trap '(exit $?); exit' 1 2 13 15 + + # Copy the file name to the temp name. +$doit $cpprog "$src" "$dsttmp" && + + # and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits. + # + # If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing. If we want to + # ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore + # errors from the above "$doit $cpprog$src $dsttmp" command. + # + { test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit$chowncmd "$dsttmp"; } \ + && { test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit$chgrpcmd "$dsttmp"; } \ + && { test -z "$stripcmd" || $doit$stripcmd "$dsttmp"; } \ + && { test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit$chmodcmd "$dsttmp"; } && + + # Now rename the file to the real destination. + {$doit $mvcmd -f "$dsttmp" "$dstdir/$dstfile" 2>/dev/null \
+      || {
+          # The rename failed, perhaps because mv can't rename something else
+          # to itself, or perhaps because mv is so ancient that it does not
+          # support -f.
+
+          # Now remove or move aside any old file at destination location.
+          # We try this two ways since rm can't unlink itself on some
+          # systems and the destination file might be busy for other
+          # reasons.  In this case, the final cleanup might fail but the new
+          # file should still install successfully.
+          {
+            if test -f "$dstdir/$dstfile"; then
+              $doit$rmcmd -f "$dstdir/$dstfile" 2>/dev/null \
+              || $doit$mvcmd -f "$dstdir/$dstfile" "$rmtmp" 2>/dev/null \ + || { + echo "$0: cannot unlink or rename $dstdir/$dstfile" >&2
+                (exit 1); exit 1
+              }
+            else
+              :
+            fi
+          } &&
+
+          # Now rename the file to the real destination.
+          $doit$mvcmd "$dsttmp" "$dstdir/$dstfile" + } + } + fi || { (exit 1); exit 1; } +done + +# The final little trick to "correctly" pass the exit status to the exit trap. +{ + (exit 0); exit 0 +} + +# Local variables: +# eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) +# time-stamp-start: "scriptversion=" +# time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" +# time-stamp-end: "$"
+# End:

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/flightrecorder.c
(rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/flightrecorder.c 2007-11-01
17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+/*
+   flightrecorder - A recorder for runtime information gathered by AOP advices
or other process internal checks
+
+   Copyright (C) 2007 Nils Durner
+
+   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+   the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+   any later version.
+
+   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+   GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+   Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+#include <termios.h>
+#include <grp.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+*/
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <getopt.h>
+#include "system.h"
+
+#define EXIT_FAILURE 1
+
+char *xmalloc ();
+char *xrealloc ();
+char *xstrdup ();
+
+
+static void usage (int status);
+
+/* The name the program was run with, stripped of any leading path. */
+char *program_name;
+
+/* getopt_long return codes */
+enum {DUMMY_CODE=129
+};
+
+/* Option flags and variables */
+
+
+static struct option const long_options[] =
+{
+  {"help", no_argument, 0, 'h'},
+  {"version", no_argument, 0, 'V'},
+  {NULL, 0, NULL, 0}
+};
+
+static int decode_switches (int argc, char **argv);
+
+int
+main (int argc, char **argv)
+{
+  int i;
+
+  program_name = argv[0];
+
+  i = decode_switches (argc, argv);
+
+  /* do the work */
+
+  exit (0);
+}
+
+/* Set all the option flags according to the switches specified.
+   Return the index of the first non-option argument.  */
+
+static int
+decode_switches (int argc, char **argv)
+{
+  int c;
+
+
+  while ((c = getopt_long (argc, argv,
+                          "h"  /* help */
+                          "V", /* version */
+                          long_options, (int *) 0)) != EOF)
+    {
+      switch (c)
+       {
+       case 'V':
+         printf ("flightrecorder %s\n", VERSION);
+         exit (0);
+
+       case 'h':
+         usage (0);
+
+       default:
+         usage (EXIT_FAILURE);
+       }
+    }
+
+  return optind;
+}
+
+
+static void
+usage (int status)
+{
+  printf (_("%s - \
+A recorder for runtime information gathered by AOP advices or other process
internal checks\n"), program_name);
+  printf (_("Usage: %s [OPTION]... [FILE]...\n"), program_name);
+  printf (_("\
+Options:\n\
+  -h, --help                 display this help and exit\n\
+  -V, --version              output version information and exit\n\
+"));
+  exit (status);
+}

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/getopt.c
(rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/getopt.c 2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC
(rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,1055 @@
+/* Getopt for GNU.
+   NOTE: getopt is now part of the C library, so if you don't know what
+   "Keep this file name-space clean" means, talk to address@hidden
+   before changing it!
+
+   Copyright (C) 1987, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000
+       Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+   The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+   modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as
+   published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the
+
+   The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+   Library General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+   License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB.  If not,
+   write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+   Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.  */
+
+/* This tells Alpha OSF/1 not to define a getopt prototype in <stdio.h>.
+   Ditto for AIX 3.2 and <stdlib.h>.  */
+#ifndef _NO_PROTO
+# define _NO_PROTO
+#endif
+
+#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
+# include <config.h>
+#endif
+
+#if !defined __STDC__ || !__STDC__
+/* This is a separate conditional since some stdc systems
+   reject defined (const)'.  */
+# ifndef const
+#  define const
+# endif
+#endif
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+/* Comment out all this code if we are using the GNU C Library, and are not
+   actually compiling the library itself.  This code is part of the GNU C
+   Library, but also included in many other GNU distributions.  Compiling
+   and linking in this code is a waste when using the GNU C library
+   (especially if it is a shared library).  Rather than having every GNU
+   program understand configure --with-gnu-libc' and omit the object files,
+   it is simpler to just do this in the source for each such file.  */
+
+#define GETOPT_INTERFACE_VERSION 2
+#if !defined _LIBC && defined __GLIBC__ && __GLIBC__ >= 2
+# include <gnu-versions.h>
+# if _GNU_GETOPT_INTERFACE_VERSION == GETOPT_INTERFACE_VERSION
+#  define ELIDE_CODE
+# endif
+#endif
+
+#ifndef ELIDE_CODE
+
+
+/* This needs to come after some library #include
+   to get __GNU_LIBRARY__ defined.  */
+#ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__
+/* Don't include stdlib.h for non-GNU C libraries because some of them
+   contain conflicting prototypes for getopt.  */
+# include <stdlib.h>
+# include <unistd.h>
+#endif /* GNU C library.  */
+
+#ifdef VMS
+# include <unixlib.h>
+# if HAVE_STRING_H - 0
+#  include <string.h>
+# endif
+#endif
+
+#ifndef _
+/* This is for other GNU distributions with internationalized messages.
+   When compiling libc, the _ macro is predefined.  */
+# ifdef HAVE_LIBINTL_H
+#  include <libintl.h>
+#  define _(msgid)     gettext (msgid)
+# else
+#  define _(msgid)     (msgid)
+# endif
+#endif
+
+/* This version of getopt' appears to the caller like standard Unix getopt'
+   but it behaves differently for the user, since it allows the user
+   to intersperse the options with the other arguments.
+
+   As getopt' works, it permutes the elements of ARGV so that,
+   when it is done, all the options precede everything else.  Thus
+   all application programs are extended to handle flexible argument order.
+
+   Setting the environment variable POSIXLY_CORRECT disables permutation.
+   Then the behavior is completely standard.
+
+   GNU application programs can use a third alternative mode in which
+   they can distinguish the relative order of options and other arguments.  */
+
+#include "getopt.h"
+
+/* For communication from getopt' to the caller.
+   When getopt' finds an option that takes an argument,
+   the argument value is returned here.
+   Also, when ordering' is RETURN_IN_ORDER,
+   each non-option ARGV-element is returned here.  */
+
+char *optarg;
+
+/* Index in ARGV of the next element to be scanned.
+   This is used for communication to and from the caller
+   and for communication between successive calls to getopt'.
+
+   On entry to getopt', zero means this is the first call; initialize.
+
+   When getopt' returns -1, this is the index of the first of the
+   non-option elements that the caller should itself scan.
+
+   Otherwise, optind' communicates from one call to the next
+   how much of ARGV has been scanned so far.  */
+
+/* 1003.2 says this must be 1 before any call.  */
+int optind = 1;
+
+/* Formerly, initialization of getopt depended on optind==0, which
+   causes problems with re-calling getopt as programs generally don't
+   know that. */
+
+int __getopt_initialized;
+
+/* The next char to be scanned in the option-element
+   in which the last option character we returned was found.
+   This allows us to pick up the scan where we left off.
+
+   If this is zero, or a null string, it means resume the scan
+   by advancing to the next ARGV-element.  */
+
+static char *nextchar;
+
+/* Callers store zero here to inhibit the error message
+   for unrecognized options.  */
+
+int opterr = 1;
+
+/* Set to an option character which was unrecognized.
+   This must be initialized on some systems to avoid linking in the
+   system's own getopt implementation.  */
+
+int optopt = '?';
+
+/* Describe how to deal with options that follow non-option ARGV-elements.
+
+   If the caller did not specify anything,
+   the default is REQUIRE_ORDER if the environment variable
+   POSIXLY_CORRECT is defined, PERMUTE otherwise.
+
+   REQUIRE_ORDER means don't recognize them as options;
+   stop option processing when the first non-option is seen.
+   This is what Unix does.
+   This mode of operation is selected by either setting the environment
+   variable POSIXLY_CORRECT, or using +' as the first character
+   of the list of option characters.
+
+   PERMUTE is the default.  We permute the contents of ARGV as we scan,
+   so that eventually all the non-options are at the end.  This allows options
+   to be given in any order, even with programs that were not written to
+   expect this.
+
+   RETURN_IN_ORDER is an option available to programs that were written
+   to expect options and other ARGV-elements in any order and that care about
+   the ordering of the two.  We describe each non-option ARGV-element
+   as if it were the argument of an option with character code 1.
+   Using -' as the first character of the list of option characters
+   selects this mode of operation.
+
+   The special argument --' forces an end of option-scanning regardless
+   of the value of ordering'.  In the case of RETURN_IN_ORDER, only
+   --' can cause getopt' to return -1 with optind' != ARGC.  */
+
+static enum
+{
+  REQUIRE_ORDER, PERMUTE, RETURN_IN_ORDER
+} ordering;
+
+/* Value of POSIXLY_CORRECT environment variable.  */
+static char *posixly_correct;
+
+#ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__
+/* We want to avoid inclusion of string.h with non-GNU libraries
+   because there are many ways it can cause trouble.
+   On some systems, it contains special magic macros that don't work
+   in GCC.  */
+# include <string.h>
+# define my_index      strchr
+#else
+
+# if HAVE_STRING_H
+#  include <string.h>
+# else
+#  include <strings.h>
+# endif
+
+/* Avoid depending on library functions or files
+   whose names are inconsistent.  */
+
+#ifndef getenv
+extern char *getenv ();
+#endif
+
+static char *
+my_index (str, chr)
+     const char *str;
+     int chr;
+{
+  while (*str)
+    {
+      if (*str == chr)
+       return (char *) str;
+      str++;
+    }
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/* If using GCC, we can safely declare strlen this way.
+   If not using GCC, it is ok not to declare it.  */
+#ifdef __GNUC__
+/* Note that Motorola Delta 68k R3V7 comes with GCC but not stddef.h.
+   That was relevant to code that was here before.  */
+# if (!defined __STDC__ || !__STDC__) && !defined strlen
+/* gcc with -traditional declares the built-in strlen to return int,
+   and has done so at least since version 2.4.5. -- rms.  */
+extern int strlen (const char *);
+# endif /* not __STDC__ */
+#endif /* __GNUC__ */
+
+#endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */
+
+/* Handle permutation of arguments.  */
+
+/* Describe the part of ARGV that contains non-options that have
+   been skipped.  first_nonopt' is the index in ARGV of the first of them;
+   last_nonopt' is the index after the last of them.  */
+
+static int first_nonopt;
+static int last_nonopt;
+
+#ifdef _LIBC
+/* Bash 2.0 gives us an environment variable containing flags
+   indicating ARGV elements that should not be considered arguments.  */
+
+/* Defined in getopt_init.c  */
+extern char *__getopt_nonoption_flags;
+
+static int nonoption_flags_max_len;
+static int nonoption_flags_len;
+
+static int original_argc;
+static char *const *original_argv;
+
+/* Make sure the environment variable bash 2.0 puts in the environment
+   is valid for the getopt call we must make sure that the ARGV passed
+   to getopt is that one passed to the process.  */
+static void
+__attribute__ ((unused))
+store_args_and_env (int argc, char *const *argv)
+{
+  /* XXX This is no good solution.  We should rather copy the args so
+     that we can compare them later.  But we must not use malloc(3).  */
+  original_argc = argc;
+  original_argv = argv;
+}
+# ifdef text_set_element
+text_set_element (__libc_subinit, store_args_and_env);
+# endif /* text_set_element */
+
+# define SWAP_FLAGS(ch1, ch2) \
+  if (nonoption_flags_len > 0)                                               \
+    {                                                                        \
+      char __tmp = __getopt_nonoption_flags[ch1];                            \
+      __getopt_nonoption_flags[ch1] = __getopt_nonoption_flags[ch2];         \
+      __getopt_nonoption_flags[ch2] = __tmp;                                 \
+    }
+#else  /* !_LIBC */
+# define SWAP_FLAGS(ch1, ch2)
+#endif /* _LIBC */
+
+/* Exchange two adjacent subsequences of ARGV.
+   One subsequence is elements [first_nonopt,last_nonopt)
+   which contains all the non-options that have been skipped so far.
+   The other is elements [last_nonopt,optind), which contains all
+   the options processed since those non-options were skipped.
+
+   first_nonopt' and last_nonopt' are relocated so that they describe
+   the new indices of the non-options in ARGV after they are moved.  */
+
+#if defined __STDC__ && __STDC__
+static void exchange (char **);
+#endif
+
+static void
+exchange (argv)
+     char **argv;
+{
+  int bottom = first_nonopt;
+  int middle = last_nonopt;
+  int top = optind;
+  char *tem;
+
+  /* Exchange the shorter segment with the far end of the longer segment.
+     That puts the shorter segment into the right place.
+     It leaves the longer segment in the right place overall,
+     but it consists of two parts that need to be swapped next.  */
+
+#ifdef _LIBC
+  /* First make sure the handling of the __getopt_nonoption_flags'
+     string can work normally.  Our top argument must be in the range
+     of the string.  */
+  if (nonoption_flags_len > 0 && top >= nonoption_flags_max_len)
+    {
+      /* We must extend the array.  The user plays games with us and
+        presents new arguments.  */
+      char *new_str = malloc (top + 1);
+      if (new_str == NULL)
+       nonoption_flags_len = nonoption_flags_max_len = 0;
+      else
+       {
+         memset (__mempcpy (new_str, __getopt_nonoption_flags,
+                            nonoption_flags_max_len),
+                 '\0', top + 1 - nonoption_flags_max_len);
+         nonoption_flags_max_len = top + 1;
+         __getopt_nonoption_flags = new_str;
+       }
+    }
+#endif
+
+  while (top > middle && middle > bottom)
+    {
+      if (top - middle > middle - bottom)
+       {
+         /* Bottom segment is the short one.  */
+         int len = middle - bottom;
+         register int i;
+
+         /* Swap it with the top part of the top segment.  */
+         for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
+           {
+             tem = argv[bottom + i];
+             argv[bottom + i] = argv[top - (middle - bottom) + i];
+             argv[top - (middle - bottom) + i] = tem;
+             SWAP_FLAGS (bottom + i, top - (middle - bottom) + i);
+           }
+         /* Exclude the moved bottom segment from further swapping.  */
+         top -= len;
+       }
+      else
+       {
+         /* Top segment is the short one.  */
+         int len = top - middle;
+         register int i;
+
+         /* Swap it with the bottom part of the bottom segment.  */
+         for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
+           {
+             tem = argv[bottom + i];
+             argv[bottom + i] = argv[middle + i];
+             argv[middle + i] = tem;
+             SWAP_FLAGS (bottom + i, middle + i);
+           }
+         /* Exclude the moved top segment from further swapping.  */
+         bottom += len;
+       }
+    }
+
+  /* Update records for the slots the non-options now occupy.  */
+
+  first_nonopt += (optind - last_nonopt);
+  last_nonopt = optind;
+}
+
+/* Initialize the internal data when the first call is made.  */
+
+#if defined __STDC__ && __STDC__
+static const char *_getopt_initialize (int, char *const *, const char *);
+#endif
+static const char *
+_getopt_initialize (argc, argv, optstring)
+     int argc;
+     char *const *argv;
+     const char *optstring;
+{
+  /* Start processing options with ARGV-element 1 (since ARGV-element 0
+     is the program name); the sequence of previously skipped
+     non-option ARGV-elements is empty.  */
+
+  first_nonopt = last_nonopt = optind;
+
+  nextchar = NULL;
+
+  posixly_correct = getenv ("POSIXLY_CORRECT");
+
+  /* Determine how to handle the ordering of options and nonoptions.  */
+
+  if (optstring[0] == '-')
+    {
+      ordering = RETURN_IN_ORDER;
+      ++optstring;
+    }
+  else if (optstring[0] == '+')
+    {
+      ordering = REQUIRE_ORDER;
+      ++optstring;
+    }
+  else if (posixly_correct != NULL)
+    ordering = REQUIRE_ORDER;
+  else
+    ordering = PERMUTE;
+
+#ifdef _LIBC
+  if (posixly_correct == NULL
+      && argc == original_argc && argv == original_argv)
+    {
+      if (nonoption_flags_max_len == 0)
+       {
+         if (__getopt_nonoption_flags == NULL
+             || __getopt_nonoption_flags[0] == '\0')
+           nonoption_flags_max_len = -1;
+         else
+           {
+             const char *orig_str = __getopt_nonoption_flags;
+             int len = nonoption_flags_max_len = strlen (orig_str);
+             if (nonoption_flags_max_len < argc)
+               nonoption_flags_max_len = argc;
+             __getopt_nonoption_flags =
+               (char *) malloc (nonoption_flags_max_len);
+             if (__getopt_nonoption_flags == NULL)
+               nonoption_flags_max_len = -1;
+             else
+               memset (__mempcpy (__getopt_nonoption_flags, orig_str, len),
+                       '\0', nonoption_flags_max_len - len);
+           }
+       }
+      nonoption_flags_len = nonoption_flags_max_len;
+    }
+  else
+    nonoption_flags_len = 0;
+#endif
+
+  return optstring;
+}
+
+/* Scan elements of ARGV (whose length is ARGC) for option characters
+   given in OPTSTRING.
+
+   If an element of ARGV starts with '-', and is not exactly "-" or "--",
+   then it is an option element.  The characters of this element
+   (aside from the initial '-') are option characters.  If getopt'
+   is called repeatedly, it returns successively each of the option characters
+   from each of the option elements.
+
+   If getopt' finds another option character, it returns that character,
+   updating optind' and nextchar' so that the next call to getopt' can
+   resume the scan with the following option character or ARGV-element.
+
+   If there are no more option characters, getopt' returns -1.
+   Then optind' is the index in ARGV of the first ARGV-element
+   that is not an option.  (The ARGV-elements have been permuted
+   so that those that are not options now come last.)
+
+   OPTSTRING is a string containing the legitimate option characters.
+   If an option character is seen that is not listed in OPTSTRING,
+   return '?' after printing an error message.  If you set opterr' to
+   zero, the error message is suppressed but we still return '?'.
+
+   If a char in OPTSTRING is followed by a colon, that means it wants an arg,
+   so the following text in the same ARGV-element, or the text of the following
+   ARGV-element, is returned in optarg'.  Two colons mean an option that
+   wants an optional arg; if there is text in the current ARGV-element,
+   it is returned in optarg', otherwise optarg' is set to zero.
+
+   If OPTSTRING starts with -' or +', it requests different methods of
+   handling the non-option ARGV-elements.
+
+   Long-named options begin with --' instead of -'.
+   Their names may be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation is unique
+   or is an exact match for some defined option.  If they have an
+   argument, it follows the option name in the same ARGV-element, separated
+   from the option name by a =', or else the in next ARGV-element.
+   When getopt' finds a long-named option, it returns 0 if that option's
+   flag' field is nonzero, the value of the option's val' field
+   if the flag' field is zero.
+
+   The elements of ARGV aren't really const, because we permute them.
+   But we pretend they're const in the prototype to be compatible
+   with other systems.
+
+   LONGOPTS is a vector of struct option' terminated by an
+   element containing a name which is zero.
+
+   LONGIND returns the index in LONGOPT of the long-named option found.
+   It is only valid when a long-named option has been found by the most
+   recent call.
+
+   If LONG_ONLY is nonzero, '-' as well as '--' can introduce
+   long-named options.  */
+
+int
+_getopt_internal (argc, argv, optstring, longopts, longind, long_only)
+     int argc;
+     char *const *argv;
+     const char *optstring;
+     const struct option *longopts;
+     int *longind;
+     int long_only;
+{
+  int print_errors = opterr;
+  if (optstring[0] == ':')
+    print_errors = 0;
+
+  optarg = NULL;
+
+  if (optind == 0 || !__getopt_initialized)
+    {
+      if (optind == 0)
+       optind = 1;     /* Don't scan ARGV[0], the program name.  */
+      optstring = _getopt_initialize (argc, argv, optstring);
+      __getopt_initialized = 1;
+    }
+
+  /* Test whether ARGV[optind] points to a non-option argument.
+     Either it does not have option syntax, or there is an environment flag
+     from the shell indicating it is not an option.  The later information
+     is only used when the used in the GNU libc.  */
+#ifdef _LIBC
+# define NONOPTION_P (argv[optind][0] != '-' || argv[optind][1] == '\0'
\
+                     || (optind < nonoption_flags_len                        \
+                         && __getopt_nonoption_flags[optind] == '1'))
+#else
+# define NONOPTION_P (argv[optind][0] != '-' || argv[optind][1] == '\0')
+#endif
+
+  if (nextchar == NULL || *nextchar == '\0')
+    {
+      /* Advance to the next ARGV-element.  */
+
+      /* Give FIRST_NONOPT & LAST_NONOPT rational values if OPTIND has been
+        moved back by the user (who may also have changed the arguments).  */
+      if (last_nonopt > optind)
+       last_nonopt = optind;
+      if (first_nonopt > optind)
+       first_nonopt = optind;
+
+      if (ordering == PERMUTE)
+       {
+         /* If we have just processed some options following some non-options,
+            exchange them so that the options come first.  */
+
+         if (first_nonopt != last_nonopt && last_nonopt != optind)
+           exchange ((char **) argv);
+         else if (last_nonopt != optind)
+           first_nonopt = optind;
+
+         /* Skip any additional non-options
+            and extend the range of non-options previously skipped.  */
+
+         while (optind < argc && NONOPTION_P)
+           optind++;
+         last_nonopt = optind;
+       }
+
+      /* The special ARGV-element --' means premature end of options.
+        Skip it like a null option,
+        then exchange with previous non-options as if it were an option,
+        then skip everything else like a non-option.  */
+
+      if (optind != argc && !strcmp (argv[optind], "--"))
+       {
+         optind++;
+
+         if (first_nonopt != last_nonopt && last_nonopt != optind)
+           exchange ((char **) argv);
+         else if (first_nonopt == last_nonopt)
+           first_nonopt = optind;
+         last_nonopt = argc;
+
+         optind = argc;
+       }
+
+      /* If we have done all the ARGV-elements, stop the scan
+        and back over any non-options that we skipped and permuted.  */
+
+      if (optind == argc)
+       {
+         /* Set the next-arg-index to point at the non-options
+            that we previously skipped, so the caller will digest them.  */
+         if (first_nonopt != last_nonopt)
+           optind = first_nonopt;
+         return -1;
+       }
+
+      /* If we have come to a non-option and did not permute it,
+        either stop the scan or describe it to the caller and pass it by.  */
+
+      if (NONOPTION_P)
+       {
+         if (ordering == REQUIRE_ORDER)
+           return -1;
+         optarg = argv[optind++];
+         return 1;
+       }
+
+      /* We have found another option-ARGV-element.
+        Skip the initial punctuation.  */
+
+      nextchar = (argv[optind] + 1
+                 + (longopts != NULL && argv[optind][1] == '-'));
+    }
+
+  /* Decode the current option-ARGV-element.  */
+
+  /* Check whether the ARGV-element is a long option.
+
+     If long_only and the ARGV-element has the form "-f", where f is
+     a valid short option, don't consider it an abbreviated form of
+     a long option that starts with f.  Otherwise there would be no
+     way to give the -f short option.
+
+     On the other hand, if there's a long option "fubar" and
+     the ARGV-element is "-fu", do consider that an abbreviation of
+     the long option, just like "--fu", and not "-f" with arg "u".
+
+     This distinction seems to be the most useful approach.  */
+
+  if (longopts != NULL
+      && (argv[optind][1] == '-'
+         || (long_only && (argv[optind][2] || !my_index (optstring,
argv[optind][1])))))
+    {
+      char *nameend;
+      const struct option *p;
+      const struct option *pfound = NULL;
+      int exact = 0;
+      int ambig = 0;
+      int indfound = -1;
+      int option_index;
+
+      for (nameend = nextchar; *nameend && *nameend != '='; nameend++)
+       /* Do nothing.  */ ;
+
+      /* Test all long options for either exact match
+        or abbreviated matches.  */
+      for (p = longopts, option_index = 0; p->name; p++, option_index++)
+       if (!strncmp (p->name, nextchar, nameend - nextchar))
+         {
+           if ((unsigned int) (nameend - nextchar)
+               == (unsigned int) strlen (p->name))
+             {
+               /* Exact match found.  */
+               pfound = p;
+               indfound = option_index;
+               exact = 1;
+               break;
+             }
+           else if (pfound == NULL)
+             {
+               /* First nonexact match found.  */
+               pfound = p;
+               indfound = option_index;
+             }
+           else
+             /* Second or later nonexact match found.  */
+             ambig = 1;
+         }
+
+      if (ambig && !exact)
+       {
+         if (print_errors)
+           fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option %s' is ambiguous\n"),
+                    argv[0], argv[optind]);
+         nextchar += strlen (nextchar);
+         optind++;
+         optopt = 0;
+         return '?';
+       }
+
+      if (pfound != NULL)
+       {
+         option_index = indfound;
+         optind++;
+         if (*nameend)
+           {
+             /* Don't test has_arg with >, because some C compilers don't
+                allow it to be used on enums.  */
+             if (pfound->has_arg)
+               optarg = nameend + 1;
+             else
+               {
+                 if (print_errors)
+                   {
+                     if (argv[optind - 1][1] == '-')
+                       /* --option */
+                       fprintf (stderr,
+                                _("%s: option --%s' doesn't allow an
argument\n"),
+                                argv[0], pfound->name);
+                     else
+                       /* +option or -option */
+                       fprintf (stderr,
+                                _("%s: option %c%s' doesn't allow an
argument\n"),
+                                argv[0], argv[optind - 1][0], pfound->name);
+                   }
+
+                 nextchar += strlen (nextchar);
+
+                 optopt = pfound->val;
+                 return '?';
+               }
+           }
+         else if (pfound->has_arg == 1)
+           {
+             if (optind < argc)
+               optarg = argv[optind++];
+             else
+               {
+                 if (print_errors)
+                   fprintf (stderr,
+                          _("%s: option %s' requires an argument\n"),
+                          argv[0], argv[optind - 1]);
+                 nextchar += strlen (nextchar);
+                 optopt = pfound->val;
+                 return optstring[0] == ':' ? ':' : '?';
+               }
+           }
+         nextchar += strlen (nextchar);
+         if (longind != NULL)
+           *longind = option_index;
+         if (pfound->flag)
+           {
+             *(pfound->flag) = pfound->val;
+             return 0;
+           }
+         return pfound->val;
+       }
+
+      /* Can't find it as a long option.  If this is not getopt_long_only,
+        or the option starts with '--' or is not a valid short
+        option, then it's an error.
+        Otherwise interpret it as a short option.  */
+      if (!long_only || argv[optind][1] == '-'
+         || my_index (optstring, *nextchar) == NULL)
+       {
+         if (print_errors)
+           {
+             if (argv[optind][1] == '-')
+               /* --option */
+               fprintf (stderr, _("%s: unrecognized option --%s'\n"),
+                        argv[0], nextchar);
+             else
+               /* +option or -option */
+               fprintf (stderr, _("%s: unrecognized option %c%s'\n"),
+                        argv[0], argv[optind][0], nextchar);
+           }
+         nextchar = (char *) "";
+         optind++;
+         optopt = 0;
+         return '?';
+       }
+    }
+
+  /* Look at and handle the next short option-character.  */
+
+  {
+    char c = *nextchar++;
+    char *temp = my_index (optstring, c);
+
+    /* Increment optind' when we start to process its last character.  */
+    if (*nextchar == '\0')
+      ++optind;
+
+    if (temp == NULL || c == ':')
+      {
+       if (print_errors)
+         {
+           if (posixly_correct)
+             /* 1003.2 specifies the format of this message.  */
+             fprintf (stderr, _("%s: illegal option -- %c\n"),
+                      argv[0], c);
+           else
+             fprintf (stderr, _("%s: invalid option -- %c\n"),
+                      argv[0], c);
+         }
+       optopt = c;
+       return '?';
+      }
+    /* Convenience. Treat POSIX -W foo same as long option --foo */
+    if (temp[0] == 'W' && temp[1] == ';')
+      {
+       char *nameend;
+       const struct option *p;
+       const struct option *pfound = NULL;
+       int exact = 0;
+       int ambig = 0;
+       int indfound = 0;
+       int option_index;
+
+       /* This is an option that requires an argument.  */
+       if (*nextchar != '\0')
+         {
+           optarg = nextchar;
+           /* If we end this ARGV-element by taking the rest as an arg,
+              we must advance to the next element now.  */
+           optind++;
+         }
+       else if (optind == argc)
+         {
+           if (print_errors)
+             {
+               /* 1003.2 specifies the format of this message.  */
+               fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option requires an argument -- %c\n"),
+                        argv[0], c);
+             }
+           optopt = c;
+           if (optstring[0] == ':')
+             c = ':';
+           else
+             c = '?';
+           return c;
+         }
+       else
+         /* We already incremented optind' once;
+            increment it again when taking next ARGV-elt as argument.  */
+         optarg = argv[optind++];
+
+       /* optarg is now the argument, see if it's in the
+          table of longopts.  */
+
+       for (nextchar = nameend = optarg; *nameend && *nameend != '=';
nameend++)
+         /* Do nothing.  */ ;
+
+       /* Test all long options for either exact match
+          or abbreviated matches.  */
+       for (p = longopts, option_index = 0; p->name; p++, option_index++)
+         if (!strncmp (p->name, nextchar, nameend - nextchar))
+           {
+             if ((unsigned int) (nameend - nextchar) == strlen (p->name))
+               {
+                 /* Exact match found.  */
+                 pfound = p;
+                 indfound = option_index;
+                 exact = 1;
+                 break;
+               }
+             else if (pfound == NULL)
+               {
+                 /* First nonexact match found.  */
+                 pfound = p;
+                 indfound = option_index;
+               }
+             else
+               /* Second or later nonexact match found.  */
+               ambig = 1;
+           }
+       if (ambig && !exact)
+         {
+           if (print_errors)
+             fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option -W %s' is ambiguous\n"),
+                      argv[0], argv[optind]);
+           nextchar += strlen (nextchar);
+           optind++;
+           return '?';
+         }
+       if (pfound != NULL)
+         {
+           option_index = indfound;
+           if (*nameend)
+             {
+               /* Don't test has_arg with >, because some C compilers don't
+                  allow it to be used on enums.  */
+               if (pfound->has_arg)
+                 optarg = nameend + 1;
+               else
+                 {
+                   if (print_errors)
+                     fprintf (stderr, _("\
+%s: option -W %s' doesn't allow an argument\n"),
+                              argv[0], pfound->name);
+
+                   nextchar += strlen (nextchar);
+                   return '?';
+                 }
+             }
+           else if (pfound->has_arg == 1)
+             {
+               if (optind < argc)
+                 optarg = argv[optind++];
+               else
+                 {
+                   if (print_errors)
+                     fprintf (stderr,
+                              _("%s: option %s' requires an argument\n"),
+                              argv[0], argv[optind - 1]);
+                   nextchar += strlen (nextchar);
+                   return optstring[0] == ':' ? ':' : '?';
+                 }
+             }
+           nextchar += strlen (nextchar);
+           if (longind != NULL)
+             *longind = option_index;
+           if (pfound->flag)
+             {
+               *(pfound->flag) = pfound->val;
+               return 0;
+             }
+           return pfound->val;
+         }
+         nextchar = NULL;
+         return 'W';   /* Let the application handle it.   */
+      }
+    if (temp[1] == ':')
+      {
+       if (temp[2] == ':')
+         {
+           /* This is an option that accepts an argument optionally.  */
+           if (*nextchar != '\0')
+             {
+               optarg = nextchar;
+               optind++;
+             }
+           else
+             optarg = NULL;
+           nextchar = NULL;
+         }
+       else
+         {
+           /* This is an option that requires an argument.  */
+           if (*nextchar != '\0')
+             {
+               optarg = nextchar;
+               /* If we end this ARGV-element by taking the rest as an arg,
+                  we must advance to the next element now.  */
+               optind++;
+             }
+           else if (optind == argc)
+             {
+               if (print_errors)
+                 {
+                   /* 1003.2 specifies the format of this message.  */
+                   fprintf (stderr,
+                            _("%s: option requires an argument -- %c\n"),
+                            argv[0], c);
+                 }
+               optopt = c;
+               if (optstring[0] == ':')
+                 c = ':';
+               else
+                 c = '?';
+             }
+           else
+             /* We already incremented optind' once;
+                increment it again when taking next ARGV-elt as argument.  */
+             optarg = argv[optind++];
+           nextchar = NULL;
+         }
+      }
+    return c;
+  }
+}
+
+int
+getopt (argc, argv, optstring)
+     int argc;
+     char *const *argv;
+     const char *optstring;
+{
+  return _getopt_internal (argc, argv, optstring,
+                          (const struct option *) 0,
+                          (int *) 0,
+                          0);
+}
+
+#endif /* Not ELIDE_CODE.  */
+
+#ifdef TEST
+
+/* Compile with -DTEST to make an executable for use in testing
+   the above definition of getopt'.  */
+
+int
+main (argc, argv)
+     int argc;
+     char **argv;
+{
+  int c;
+  int digit_optind = 0;
+
+  while (1)
+    {
+      int this_option_optind = optind ? optind : 1;
+
+      c = getopt (argc, argv, "abc:d:0123456789");
+      if (c == -1)
+       break;
+
+      switch (c)
+       {
+       case '0':
+       case '1':
+       case '2':
+       case '3':
+       case '4':
+       case '5':
+       case '6':
+       case '7':
+       case '8':
+       case '9':
+         if (digit_optind != 0 && digit_optind != this_option_optind)
+           printf ("digits occur in two different argv-elements.\n");
+         digit_optind = this_option_optind;
+         printf ("option %c\n", c);
+         break;
+
+       case 'a':
+         printf ("option a\n");
+         break;
+
+       case 'b':
+         printf ("option b\n");
+         break;
+
+       case 'c':
+         printf ("option c with value %s'\n", optarg);
+         break;
+
+       case '?':
+         break;
+
+       default:
+         printf ("?? getopt returned character code 0%o ??\n", c);
+       }
+    }
+
+  if (optind < argc)
+    {
+      printf ("non-option ARGV-elements: ");
+      while (optind < argc)
+       printf ("%s ", argv[optind++]);
+      printf ("\n");
+    }
+
+  exit (0);
+}
+
+#endif /* TEST */

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/getopt.h
(rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/getopt.h 2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC
(rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+/* Declarations for getopt.
+   Copyright (C) 1989,90,91,92,93,94,96,97,98 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+   This file is part of the GNU C Library.
+
+   The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+   modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as
+   published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the
+
+   The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+   Library General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+   License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB.  If not,
+   write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+   Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.  */
+
+#ifndef _GETOPT_H
+
+#ifndef __need_getopt
+# define _GETOPT_H 1
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+/* For communication from getopt' to the caller.
+   When getopt' finds an option that takes an argument,
+   the argument value is returned here.
+   Also, when ordering' is RETURN_IN_ORDER,
+   each non-option ARGV-element is returned here.  */
+
+extern char *optarg;
+
+/* Index in ARGV of the next element to be scanned.
+   This is used for communication to and from the caller
+   and for communication between successive calls to getopt'.
+
+   On entry to getopt', zero means this is the first call; initialize.
+
+   When getopt' returns -1, this is the index of the first of the
+   non-option elements that the caller should itself scan.
+
+   Otherwise, optind' communicates from one call to the next
+   how much of ARGV has been scanned so far.  */
+
+extern int optind;
+
+/* Callers store zero here to inhibit the error message getopt' prints
+   for unrecognized options.  */
+
+extern int opterr;
+
+/* Set to an option character which was unrecognized.  */
+
+extern int optopt;
+
+#ifndef __need_getopt
+/* Describe the long-named options requested by the application.
+   The LONG_OPTIONS argument to getopt_long or getopt_long_only is a vector
+   of struct option' terminated by an element containing a name which is
+   zero.
+
+   The field has_arg' is:
+   no_argument         (or 0) if the option does not take an argument,
+   required_argument   (or 1) if the option requires an argument,
+   optional_argument   (or 2) if the option takes an optional argument.
+
+   If the field flag' is not NULL, it points to a variable that is set
+   to the value given in the field val' when the option is found, but
+
+   To have a long-named option do something other than set an int' to
+   a compiled-in constant, such as set a value from optarg', set the
+   option's flag' field to zero and its val' field to a nonzero
+   value (the equivalent single-letter option character, if there is
+   one).  For long options that have a zero flag' field, getopt'
+   returns the contents of the val' field.  */
+
+struct option
+{
+# if defined __STDC__ && __STDC__
+  const char *name;
+# else
+  char *name;
+# endif
+  /* has_arg can't be an enum because some compilers complain about
+     type mismatches in all the code that assumes it is an int.  */
+  int has_arg;
+  int *flag;
+  int val;
+};
+
+/* Names for the values of the has_arg' field of struct option'.  */
+
+# define no_argument           0
+# define required_argument     1
+# define optional_argument     2
+#endif /* need getopt */
+
+
+/* Get definitions and prototypes for functions to process the
+   arguments in ARGV (ARGC of them, minus the program name) for
+   options given in OPTS.
+
+   Return the option character from OPTS just read.  Return -1 when
+   there are no more options.  For unrecognized options, or options
+   missing arguments, optopt' is set to the option letter, and '?' is
+   returned.
+
+   The OPTS string is a list of characters which are recognized option
+   letters, optionally followed by colons, specifying that that letter
+   takes an argument, to be placed in optarg'.
+
+   If a letter in OPTS is followed by two colons, its argument is
+   optional.  This behavior is specific to the GNU getopt'.
+
+   The argument --' causes premature termination of argument
+   scanning, explicitly telling getopt' that there are no more
+   options.
+
+   If OPTS begins with --', then non-option arguments are treated as
+   arguments to the option '\0'.  This behavior is specific to the GNU
+   getopt'.  */
+
+#if defined __STDC__ && __STDC__
+# ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__
+/* Many other libraries have conflicting prototypes for getopt, with
+   differences in the consts, in stdlib.h.  To avoid compilation
+   errors, only prototype getopt for the GNU C library.  */
+extern int getopt (int __argc, char *const *__argv, const char *__shortopts);
+# else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */
+extern int getopt ();
+# endif /* __GNU_LIBRARY__ */
+
+# ifndef __need_getopt
+extern int getopt_long (int __argc, char *const *__argv, const char
*__shortopts,
+                       const struct option *__longopts, int *__longind);
+extern int getopt_long_only (int __argc, char *const *__argv,
+                            const char *__shortopts,
+                            const struct option *__longopts, int *__longind);
+
+/* Internal only.  Users should not call this directly.  */
+extern int _getopt_internal (int __argc, char *const *__argv,
+                            const char *__shortopts,
+                            const struct option *__longopts, int *__longind,
+                            int __long_only);
+# endif
+#else /* not __STDC__ */
+extern int getopt ();
+# ifndef __need_getopt
+extern int getopt_long ();
+extern int getopt_long_only ();
+
+extern int _getopt_internal ();
+# endif
+#endif /* __STDC__ */
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+/* Make sure we later can get all the definitions and declarations.  */
+#undef __need_getopt
+
+#endif /* getopt.h */

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/getopt1.c
(rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/src/flighrecorderd/getopt1.c        2007-11-01
17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+/* getopt_long and getopt_long_only entry points for GNU getopt.
+     Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+   This file is part of the GNU C Library.
+
+   The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+   modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as
+   published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the
+
+   The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+   Library General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+   License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB.  If not,
+   write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+   Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.  */
+
+#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
+#include <config.h>
+#endif
+
+#include "getopt.h"
+
+#if !defined __STDC__ || !__STDC__
+/* This is a separate conditional since some stdc systems
+   reject defined (const)'.  */
+#ifndef const
+#define const
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+/* Comment out all this code if we are using the GNU C Library, and are not
+   actually compiling the library itself.  This code is part of the GNU C
+   Library, but also included in many other GNU distributions.  Compiling
+   and linking in this code is a waste when using the GNU C library
+   (especially if it is a shared library).  Rather than having every GNU
+   program understand configure --with-gnu-libc' and omit the object files,
+   it is simpler to just do this in the source for each such file.  */
+
+#define GETOPT_INTERFACE_VERSION 2
+#if !defined _LIBC && defined __GLIBC__ && __GLIBC__ >= 2
+#include <gnu-versions.h>
+#if _GNU_GETOPT_INTERFACE_VERSION == GETOPT_INTERFACE_VERSION
+#define ELIDE_CODE
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#ifndef ELIDE_CODE
+
+
+/* This needs to come after some library #include
+   to get __GNU_LIBRARY__ defined.  */
+#ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#endif
+
+#ifndef        NULL
+#define NULL 0
+#endif
+
+int
+getopt_long (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index)
+     int argc;
+     char *const *argv;
+     const char *options;
+     const struct option *long_options;
+     int *opt_index;
+{
+  return _getopt_internal (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index, 0);
+}
+
+/* Like getopt_long, but '-' as well as '--' can indicate a long option.
+   If an option that starts with '-' (not '--') doesn't match a long option,
+   but does match a short option, it is parsed as a short option
+
+int
+getopt_long_only (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index)
+     int argc;
+     char *const *argv;
+     const char *options;
+     const struct option *long_options;
+     int *opt_index;
+{
+  return _getopt_internal (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index, 1);
+}
+
+
+#endif /* Not ELIDE_CODE.  */
+
+#ifdef TEST
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+int
+main (argc, argv)
+     int argc;
+     char **argv;
+{
+  int c;
+  int digit_optind = 0;
+
+  while (1)
+    {
+      int this_option_optind = optind ? optind : 1;
+      int option_index = 0;
+      static struct option long_options[] =
+      {
+       {"append", 0, 0, 0},
+       {"delete", 1, 0, 0},
+       {"verbose", 0, 0, 0},
+       {"create", 0, 0, 0},
+       {"file", 1, 0, 0},
+       {0, 0, 0, 0}
+      };
+
+      c = getopt_long (argc, argv, "abc:d:0123456789",
+                      long_options, &option_index);
+      if (c == -1)
+       break;
+
+      switch (c)
+       {
+       case 0:
+         printf ("option %s", long_options[option_index].name);
+         if (optarg)
+           printf (" with arg %s", optarg);
+         printf ("\n");
+         break;
+
+       case '0':
+       case '1':
+       case '2':
+       case '3':
+       case '4':
+       case '5':
+       case '6':
+       case '7':
+       case '8':
+       case '9':
+         if (digit_optind != 0 && digit_optind != this_option_optind)
+           printf ("digits occur in two different argv-elements.\n");
+         digit_optind = this_option_optind;
+         printf ("option %c\n", c);
+         break;
+
+       case 'a':
+         printf ("option a\n");
+         break;
+
+       case 'b':
+         printf ("option b\n");
+         break;
+
+       case 'c':
+         printf ("option c with value %s'\n", optarg);
+         break;
+
+       case 'd':
+         printf ("option d with value %s'\n", optarg);
+         break;
+
+       case '?':
+         break;
+
+       default:
+         printf ("?? getopt returned character code 0%o ??\n", c);
+       }
+    }
+
+  if (optind < argc)
+    {
+      printf ("non-option ARGV-elements: ");
+      while (optind < argc)
+       printf ("%s ", argv[optind++]);
+      printf ("\n");
+    }
+
+  exit (0);
+}
+
+#endif /* TEST */

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/src/include/system.h
(rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/src/include/system.h        2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC
(rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,395 @@
+/* system-dependent definitions for flightrecorder
+
+   Written for GNU fileutils.
+   Adapted for autoproject by James R. Van Zandt.
+
+   Copyright (C) 89, 91, 92, 93, 94, 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+   the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+   any later version.
+
+   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+   GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+   Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.  */
+
+#if HAVE_CONFIG_H
+#include "config.h"
+#endif /* HAVE_CONFIG_H */
+
+/* Include sys/types.h before this file.  */
+
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+
+#ifdef STAT_MACROS_BROKEN
+#undef S_ISBLK
+#undef S_ISCHR
+#undef S_ISDIR
+#undef S_ISFIFO
+#undef S_ISLNK
+#undef S_ISMPB
+#undef S_ISMPC
+#undef S_ISNWK
+#undef S_ISREG
+#undef S_ISSOCK
+#endif /* STAT_MACROS_BROKEN.  */
+
+#ifndef S_IFMT
+#define S_IFMT 0170000
+#endif
+#if !defined(S_ISBLK) && defined(S_IFBLK)
+#define S_ISBLK(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFBLK)
+#endif
+#if !defined(S_ISCHR) && defined(S_IFCHR)
+#define S_ISCHR(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFCHR)
+#endif
+#if !defined(S_ISDIR) && defined(S_IFDIR)
+#define S_ISDIR(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFDIR)
+#endif
+#if !defined(S_ISREG) && defined(S_IFREG)
+#define S_ISREG(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFREG)
+#endif
+#if !defined(S_ISFIFO) && defined(S_IFIFO)
+#define S_ISFIFO(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFIFO)
+#endif
+#if !defined(S_ISLNK) && defined(S_IFLNK)
+#define S_ISLNK(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFLNK)
+#endif
+#if !defined(S_ISSOCK) && defined(S_IFSOCK)
+#define S_ISSOCK(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFSOCK)
+#endif
+#if !defined(S_ISMPB) && defined(S_IFMPB) /* V7 */
+#define S_ISMPB(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFMPB)
+#define S_ISMPC(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFMPC)
+#endif
+#if !defined(S_ISNWK) && defined(S_IFNWK) /* HP/UX */
+#define S_ISNWK(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFNWK)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef S_IEXEC
+#define S_IEXEC S_IXUSR
+#endif
+
+#ifndef S_IXUSR
+#define S_IXUSR S_IEXEC
+#endif
+#ifndef S_IXGRP
+#define S_IXGRP (S_IEXEC >> 3)
+#endif
+#ifndef S_IXOTH
+#define S_IXOTH (S_IEXEC >> 6)
+#endif
+#ifndef S_IXUGO
+#define S_IXUGO (S_IXUSR | S_IXGRP | S_IXOTH)
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(HAVE_MKFIFO)
+#define mkfifo(path, mode) (mknod ((path), (mode) | S_IFIFO, 0))
+#endif
+
+#ifdef HAVE_SYS_PARAM_H
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#endif
+
+/* <unistd.h> should be included before any preprocessor test
+   of _POSIX_VERSION.  */
+#ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H
+#include <unistd.h>
+#endif
+
+#ifndef STDIN_FILENO
+#define STDIN_FILENO 0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef STDOUT_FILENO
+#define STDOUT_FILENO 1
+#endif
+
+#ifndef STDERR_FILENO
+#define STDERR_FILENO 2
+#endif
+
+/* FIXME: Don't use _POSIX_VERSION.  */
+#ifndef _POSIX_VERSION
+off_t lseek ();
+#endif
+
+#ifdef TM_IN_SYS_TIME
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#else
+#include <time.h>
+#endif
+
+/* Since major is a function on SVR4, we can't use ifndef major'.  */
+#ifdef MAJOR_IN_MKDEV
+#include <sys/mkdev.h>
+#define HAVE_MAJOR
+#endif
+#ifdef MAJOR_IN_SYSMACROS
+#include <sys/sysmacros.h>
+#define HAVE_MAJOR
+#endif
+#ifdef major                   /* Might be defined in sys/types.h.  */
+#define HAVE_MAJOR
+#endif
+
+#ifndef HAVE_MAJOR
+#define major(dev)  (((dev) >> 8) & 0xff)
+#define minor(dev)  ((dev) & 0xff)
+#define makedev(maj, min)  (((maj) << 8) | (min))
+#endif
+#undef HAVE_MAJOR
+
+#ifdef HAVE_UTIME_H
+#include <utime.h>
+#endif
+
+/* Some systems (even some that do have <utime.h>) don't declare this
+   structure anywhere.  */
+#ifndef HAVE_STRUCT_UTIMBUF
+struct utimbuf
+{
+  long actime;
+  long modtime;
+};
+#endif
+
+/* Don't use bcopy!  Use memmove if source and destination may overlap,
+   memcpy otherwise.  */
+
+#ifdef HAVE_STRING_H
+#  include <memory.h>
+# endif
+# include <string.h>
+#else
+# include <strings.h>
+char *memchr ();
+#endif
+
+#include <errno.h>
+#ifndef errno
+extern int errno;
+#endif
+
+#define getopt system_getopt
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#undef getopt
+char *getenv ();
+
+/* The following test is to work around the gross typo in
+   systems like Sony NEWS-OS Release 4.0C, whereby EXIT_FAILURE
+   is defined to 0, not 1.  */
+#if !EXIT_FAILURE
+# undef EXIT_FAILURE
+# define EXIT_FAILURE 1
+#endif
+
+#ifndef EXIT_SUCCESS
+# define EXIT_SUCCESS 0
+#endif
+
+#ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#else
+#include <sys/file.h>
+#endif
+
+#ifndef SEEK_SET
+#define SEEK_SET 0
+#define SEEK_CUR 1
+#define SEEK_END 2
+#endif
+#ifndef F_OK
+#define F_OK 0
+#define X_OK 1
+#define W_OK 2
+#define R_OK 4
+#endif
+
+#ifdef HAVE_DIRENT_H
+# include <dirent.h>
+# define NLENGTH(direct) (strlen((direct)->d_name))
+#else /* not HAVE_DIRENT_H */
+# define dirent direct
+# define NLENGTH(direct) ((direct)->d_namlen)
+# ifdef HAVE_SYS_NDIR_H
+#  include <sys/ndir.h>
+# endif /* HAVE_SYS_NDIR_H */
+# ifdef HAVE_SYS_DIR_H
+#  include <sys/dir.h>
+# endif /* HAVE_SYS_DIR_H */
+# ifdef HAVE_NDIR_H
+#  include <ndir.h>
+# endif /* HAVE_NDIR_H */
+#endif /* HAVE_DIRENT_H */
+
+#ifdef CLOSEDIR_VOID
+/* Fake a return value. */
+#define CLOSEDIR(d) (closedir (d), 0)
+#else
+#define CLOSEDIR(d) closedir (d)
+#endif
+
+/* Get or fake the disk device blocksize.
+   Usually defined by sys/param.h (if at all).  */
+#ifndef DEV_BSIZE
+#ifdef BSIZE
+#define DEV_BSIZE BSIZE
+#else /* !BSIZE */
+#define DEV_BSIZE 4096
+#endif /* !BSIZE */
+#endif /* !DEV_BSIZE */
+
+/* Extract or fake data from a struct stat'.
+   ST_BLKSIZE: Optimal I/O blocksize for the file, in bytes.
+   ST_NBLOCKS: Number of 512-byte blocks in the file
+   (including indirect blocks). */
+#ifndef HAVE_ST_BLOCKS
+# define ST_BLKSIZE(statbuf) DEV_BSIZE
+# if defined(_POSIX_SOURCE) || !defined(BSIZE) /* fileblocks.c uses BSIZE.  */
+#  define ST_NBLOCKS(statbuf) (((statbuf).st_size + 512 - 1) / 512)
+# else /* !_POSIX_SOURCE && BSIZE */
+#  define ST_NBLOCKS(statbuf) (st_blocks ((statbuf).st_size))
+# endif /* !_POSIX_SOURCE && BSIZE */
+#else /* HAVE_ST_BLOCKS */
+/* Some systems, like Sequents, return st_blksize of 0 on pipes. */
+# define ST_BLKSIZE(statbuf) ((statbuf).st_blksize > 0 \
+                              ? (statbuf).st_blksize : DEV_BSIZE)
+# if defined(hpux) || defined(__hpux__) || defined(__hpux)
+/* HP-UX counts st_blocks in 1024-byte units.
+   This loses when mixing HP-UX and BSD filesystems with NFS.  */
+#  define ST_NBLOCKS(statbuf) ((statbuf).st_blocks * 2)
+# else /* !hpux */
+#  if defined(_AIX) && defined(_I386)
+/* AIX PS/2 counts st_blocks in 4K units.  */
+#   define ST_NBLOCKS(statbuf) ((statbuf).st_blocks * 8)
+#  else /* not AIX PS/2 */
+#   if defined(_CRAY)
+#    define ST_NBLOCKS(statbuf) ((statbuf).st_blocks * ST_BLKSIZE(statbuf)/512)
+#   else /* not AIX PS/2 nor CRAY */
+#    define ST_NBLOCKS(statbuf) ((statbuf).st_blocks)
+#   endif /* not _CRAY */
+#  endif /* not AIX PS/2 */
+# endif /* !hpux */
+#endif /* HAVE_ST_BLOCKS */
+
+/* Convert B 512-byte blocks to kilobytes if K is nonzero,
+   otherwise return it unchanged. */
+#define convert_blocks(b, k) ((k) ? ((b) + 1) / 2 : (b))
+
+#ifndef RETSIGTYPE
+#define RETSIGTYPE void
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __GNUC__
+# undef alloca
+# define alloca __builtin_alloca
+#else
+# ifdef HAVE_ALLOCA_H
+#  include <alloca.h>
+# else
+#  ifndef _AIX
+/* AIX alloca decl has to be the first thing in the file, bletch! */
+char *alloca ();
+#  endif
+# endif
+#endif
+
+#include <ctype.h>
+
+/* Jim Meyering writes:
+
+   "... Some ctype macros are valid only for character codes that
+   isascii says are ASCII (SGI's IRIX-4.0.5 is one such system --when
+   using /bin/cc or gcc but without giving an ansi option).  So, all
+   ctype uses should be through macros like ISPRINT...  If
+   STDC_HEADERS is defined, then autoconf has verified that the ctype
+   macros don't need to be guarded with references to isascii. ...
+   Defining isascii to 1 should let any compiler worth its salt
+   eliminate the && through constant folding."
+
+
+   "... Furthermore, isupper(c) etc. have an undefined result if c is
+   outside the range -1 <= c <= 255. One is tempted to write isupper(c)
+   with c being of type char', but this is wrong if c is an 8-bit
+   character >= 128 which gets sign-extended to a negative value.
+   The macro ISUPPER protects against this as well."  */
+
+#if defined (STDC_HEADERS) || (!defined (isascii) && !defined (HAVE_ISASCII))
+#define IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN(c) 1
+#else
+#define IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN(c) isascii(c)
+#endif
+
+#ifdef isblank
+#define ISBLANK(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && isblank (c))
+#else
+#define ISBLANK(c) ((c) == ' ' || (c) == '\t')
+#endif
+#ifdef isgraph
+#define ISGRAPH(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && isgraph (c))
+#else
+#define ISGRAPH(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && isprint (c) && !isspace (c))
+#endif
+
+#define ISPRINT(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && isprint (c))
+#define ISALNUM(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && isalnum (c))
+#define ISALPHA(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && isalpha (c))
+#define ISCNTRL(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && iscntrl (c))
+#define ISLOWER(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && islower (c))
+#define ISPUNCT(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && ispunct (c))
+#define ISSPACE(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && isspace (c))
+#define ISUPPER(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && isupper (c))
+#define ISXDIGIT(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && isxdigit (c))
+#define ISDIGIT_LOCALE(c) (IN_CTYPE_DOMAIN (c) && isdigit (c))
+
+/* ISDIGIT differs from ISDIGIT_LOCALE, as follows:
+   - Its arg may be any int or unsigned int; it need not be an unsigned char.
+   - It's guaranteed to evaluate its argument exactly once.
+   - It's typically faster.
+   Posix 1003.2-1992 section 2.5.2.1 page 50 lines 1556-1558 says that
+   only '0' through '9' are digits.  Prefer ISDIGIT to ISDIGIT_LOCALE unless
+   it's important to use the locale's definition of digit' even when the
+   host does not conform to Posix.  */
+#define ISDIGIT(c) ((unsigned) (c) - '0' <= 9)
+
+#ifndef __P
+#if defined (__GNUC__) || (defined (__STDC__) && __STDC__)
+#define __P(args) args
+#else
+#define __P(args) ()
+#endif  /* GCC.  */
+#endif  /* Not __P.  */
+
+/* Take care of NLS matters.  */
+
+#if HAVE_LOCALE_H
+# include <locale.h>
+#endif
+#if !HAVE_SETLOCALE
+# define setlocale(Category, Locale) /* empty */
+#endif
+
+#if ENABLE_NLS
+# include <libintl.h>
+# define _(Text) gettext (Text)
+#else
+# undef bindtextdomain
+# define bindtextdomain(Domain, Directory) /* empty */
+# undef textdomain
+# define textdomain(Domain) /* empty */
+# define _(Text) Text
+#endif
+
+#define STREQ(a,b) (strcmp((a), (b)) == 0)

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/src/include/xmalloc.h
(rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/src/include/xmalloc.h       2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC
(rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+/* Prototypes for functions defined in xmalloc.c  */
+
+VOID *xmalloc (size_t n);
+VOID *xcalloc (size_t n, size_t s);
+VOID *xrealloc (VOID *p, size_t n);
+char *xstrdup (char *p);

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/src/util/xmalloc.c                          (rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/src/util/xmalloc.c  2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev
5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+/* xmalloc.c -- malloc with out of memory checking
+   Copyright (C) 1990, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 99 Free Software Foundation,
Inc.
+
+   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+   the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+   any later version.
+
+   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+   GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+   Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.  */
+
+#if HAVE_CONFIG_H
+# include <config.h>
+#endif
+
+#if __STDC__
+# define VOID void
+#else
+# define VOID char
+#endif
+
+#include <stdio.h>             /* for stderr */
+
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <string.h>            /* for strlen etc. */
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+
+extern size_t strlen ();
+extern char *strcpy ();
+
+VOID *calloc ();
+VOID *malloc ();
+VOID *realloc ();
+void free ();
+#endif
+
+#if ENABLE_NLS
+# include <libintl.h>
+# define _(Text) gettext (Text)
+#else
+# define textdomain(Domain)
+# define _(Text) Text
+#endif
+
+#include <error.h>
+
+/* Prototypes for functions defined here.  */
+#if defined (__STDC__) && __STDC__
+static VOID *fixup_null_alloc (size_t n);
+VOID *xmalloc (size_t n);
+VOID *xcalloc (size_t n, size_t s);
+VOID *xrealloc (VOID *p, size_t n);
+char *xstrdup (char *p);
+#endif
+
+
+static VOID *
+fixup_null_alloc (n)
+     size_t n;
+{
+  VOID *p;
+
+  p = 0;
+  if (n == 0)
+    p = malloc ((size_t) 1);
+  if (p == 0)
+    {
+      /* possible revisions: release some memory and re-try, print
+      fprintf(stderr, _("flightrecorder: Memory exhausted"));
+      exit(1);
+    }
+  return p;
+}
+
+/* Allocate N bytes of memory dynamically, with error checking.  */
+
+VOID *
+xmalloc (n)
+     size_t n;
+{
+  VOID *p;
+
+  p = malloc (n);
+  if (p == 0)
+    p = fixup_null_alloc (n);
+  return p;
+}
+
+/* Allocate memory for N elements of S bytes, with error checking.  */
+
+VOID *
+xcalloc (n, s)
+     size_t n, s;
+{
+  VOID *p;
+
+  p = calloc (n, s);
+  if (p == 0)
+    p = fixup_null_alloc (n);
+  return p;
+}
+
+/* Change the size of an allocated block of memory P to N bytes,
+   with error checking.
+   If P is NULL, run xmalloc.  */
+
+VOID *
+xrealloc (p, n)
+     VOID *p;
+     size_t n;
+{
+  if (p == 0)
+    return xmalloc (n);
+  p = realloc (p, n);
+  if (p == 0)
+    p = fixup_null_alloc (n);
+  return p;
+}
+
+/* Make a copy of a string in a newly allocated block of memory. */
+
+char *
+xstrdup (str)
+     char *str;
+{
+  VOID *p;
+
+  p = xmalloc (strlen (str) + 1);
+  strcpy (p, str);
+  return p;
+}

===================================================================
--- branches/flightrecorder/texinfo.tex                         (rev 0)
+++ branches/flightrecorder/texinfo.tex 2007-11-01 17:59:32 UTC (rev 5724)
@@ -0,0 +1,7210 @@
+% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+%
+% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+%
+\def\texinfoversion{2005-07-05.19}
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
+% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software
+% Foundation, Inc.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
+% your option) any later version.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+% General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
+% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
+% Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
+%
+% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
+% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
+% restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
+%
+%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
+%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
+% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
+% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
+%
+% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
+% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
+%
+% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
+% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
+% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   texindex foo.??
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
+% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
+% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
+% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
+%
+% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
+% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
+% full Texinfo distribution.
+%
+
+
+
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
+  \catcode+=\active \catcode\_=\active}
+
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexcomma=\,
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
+\let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+\let\ptexgtr=>
+\let\ptexhat=^
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexindent=\indent
+\let\ptexinsert=\insert
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexless=<
+\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
+\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
+\let\ptexplus=+
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexslash=\/
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptext=\t
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = ^^J
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
+\else
+  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
+\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is
empty)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is
nonexistent)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined
\gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
+\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
+\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
+
+% In some macros, we cannot use the \? notation---the left quote is
+% in some cases the escape char.
+\chardef\backChar  = \\
+\chardef\colonChar = \:
+\chardef\commaChar = \,
+\chardef\dotChar   = \.
+\chardef\exclamChar= \!
+\chardef\plusChar  = \+
+\chardef\questChar = \?
+\chardef\semiChar  = \;
+\chardef\underChar = \_
+
+\chardef\spaceChar = \ %
+\chardef\spacecat = 10
+\def\spaceisspace{\catcode\spaceChar=\spacecat}
+
+{% for help with debugging.
+ % example usage: \expandafter\show\activebackslash
+ \catcode\! = 0 \catcode\\ = \active
+ !global!def!activebackslash{\}
+}
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+% The following is used inside several \edef's.
+\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% Hyphenation fixes.
+\hyphenation{
+  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
+  ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
+  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
+  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
+  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
+  spell-ing spell-ings
+  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
+}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen\bindingoffset
+\newdimen\normaloffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
+% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+  \leavevmode
+  %
+  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+    \vskip-\baselineskip
+    %
+    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
+    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+    \llap{%
+      %
+      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the 1pt'.
+      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+      %
+      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+      \hskip 12pt
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
+% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
+% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\def\loggingall{%
+  \tracingstats2
+  \tracingpages1
+  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
+  \tracingparagraphs1
+  \tracingoutput1
+  \tracingmacros2
+  \tracingrestores1
+  \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
+    \tracingscantokens1
+    \tracingifs1
+    \tracinggroups1
+    \tracingnesting2
+    \tracingassigns1
+  \fi
+  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
+  \errorcontextlines16
+}%
+
+% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
+% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
+%
+\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
+\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
+\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
+
+% For @cropmarks command.
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+%
+\newif\ifcropmarks
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+%
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
+\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
+\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
+
+% Main output routine.
+\chardef\PAGE = 255
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+
+\newbox\footlinebox
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
+% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+\def\onepageout#1{%
+  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+  %
+  %
+  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
+  %
+  {%
+    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+    % before the \shipout runs.
+    %
+    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
+    \shipout\vbox{%
+      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
+      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+        \hsize = \outerhsize
+        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
+        \vtop to0pt{%
+          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+          }%
+          \vss}%
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin
+        \line\bgroup
+          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+          \vbox\bgroup
+      \fi
+      %
+      \pagebody{#1}%
+      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
+        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+        \vskip 2\baselineskip
+        \unvbox\footlinebox
+      \fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks
+          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+        \vbox to0pt{\vss
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+          }%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+        }%
+      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+      \fi
+    }% end of \shipout\vbox
+  }% end of group with \indexdummies
+  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+% marginal hacks, address@hidden (Juha Takala)
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+}
+
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+%
+\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
+\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
+  \def\next{#2}%
+  \begingroup
+    \obeylines
+    \spaceisspace
+    #1%
+    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
+}
+
+{\obeylines %
+  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
+  }%
+}
+
+% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
+
+% Each occurence of \^^M' or <space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
+%
+% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
+%    @end itemize  @c foo
+% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
+% by \finishparsearg.
+%
+\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
+  \def\temp{#3}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty
+    % We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run;
+    % thus we reuse \temp.
+    \let\temp\finishparsearg
+  \else
+    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
+  \fi
+  % Put the space token in:
+  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
+}
+
+% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
+% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
+% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
+% just before passing the control to \next.
+% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
+% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
+% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
+%
+% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
+%
+\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}}
+
+% \parseargdef\foo{...}
+%      is roughly equivalent to
+% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
+% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
+%
+% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
+% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
+
+\def\parseargdef#1{%
+  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
+}
+\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
+  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
+  \def#1##1%
+}
+
+% Several utility definitions with active space:
+{
+  \obeyspaces
+  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
+
+  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+  % should produce a line of output anyway.
+  %
+  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
+
+  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty address@hidden \ ).
+  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
+}
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
+%
+%   \envdef\foo{...}
+%   \def\Efoo{...}
+%
+% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
+% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
+% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
+% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
+% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
+%
+% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
+% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group.  (The
+% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
+% special case.)
+
+
+\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
+% initialize
+\let\thisenv\empty
+
+% ... but they get defined via \envdef\foo{...}'':
+\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+
+% Check whether we're in the right environment:
+\def\checkenv#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\thisenv\temp
+  \else
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
+  \errhelp = \EMsimple
+  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
+    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+}
+\def\inenvironment#1{%
+  \ifx#1\empty
+    out of any environment%
+  \else
+    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
+%
+\parseargdef\end{%
+  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
+  \else
+    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal,
06nov03
+    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
+    \csname E#1\endcsname
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+
+%% Simple single-character @ commands
+
+% @@ prints an @
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+
+% This is turned off because it was never documented
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+%% Define @ and @' to be the same as  and '
+%% but suppressing ligatures.
+%\def\{{}}
+%\def\'{{'}}
+
+% Used to generate quoted braces.
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace
+\let\}=\myrbrace
+\begingroup
+  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
+  % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
+  \catcode\{ = \other \catcode\} = \other
+  \catcode$= 1 \catcode$ = 2
+  \catcode\! = 0 \catcode\\ = \other
+  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
+  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
+!endgroup
+
+% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
+\let\comma = ,
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @ @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
+\let\, = \c
+\let\dotaccent = \.
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \t
+\let\ubaraccent = \b
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?}
+\def\exclamdown{!}
+\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
+\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
+  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
+  \else address@hidden can be used only with i or j}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
+% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
+%
+\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
+% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
+% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
+% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
+% \scriptscriptstyle).
+%
+\def\LaTeX{%
+  L\kern-.36em
+  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
+   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
+  \kern-.15em
+  \TeX
+}
+
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+{\catcode@ = 11
+ % Avoid using address@hidden directly, because that causes trouble
+ % if the definition is written into an index file.
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+}
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @/ allows a line break.
+\let\/=\allowbreak
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+
+% @frenchspacing on|off  says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
+%
+\def\onword{on}
+\def\offword{off}
+%
+\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option \temp', must be on/off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
+% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
+% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
+% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
+% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
+% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
+%
+\newbox\groupbox
+\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
+%
+\envdef\group{%
+  \ifnum\catcode\^^M=\active \else
+    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+    address@hidden invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+  \fi
+  \startsavinginserts
+  %
+  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
+    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
+    % the address@hidden' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
+    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+    \comment
+}
+%
+% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
+% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
+% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+% above.  But it's pretty close.
+\def\Egroup{%
+    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
+    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
+    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
+    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
+  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
+  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
+  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
+  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
+  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
+  % group, force a page break.
+  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
+    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
+      \page
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \box\groupbox
+  \prevdepth = \dimen1
+  \checkinserts
+}
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., @') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing address@hidden can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
+
+% Old definition--didn't work.
+%\parseargdef\need{\par %
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+%}}
+
+\parseargdef\need{%
+  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+  % paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
+  \dimen0 = #1\mil
+  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
+  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
+    %
+    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
+    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
+    % And a page break here is fine.
+    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
+    %
+    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
+    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
+    %
+    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
+    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+    \penalty9999
+    %
+    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+    \kern -#1\mil
+    %
+    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+    \nobreak
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @page forces the start of a new page.
+%
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
+% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
+% class.  WHICH is l' or r'.
+%
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+%
+  \nobreak
+  \kern-\strutdepth
+  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
+    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
+    \vss
+    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
+    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
+    \ifx#1l%
+      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
+    \else
+      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
+    \fi
+    \null
+  }%
+}}
+\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
+\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
+%
+% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
+% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
+% else use TEXT for both).
+%
+\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
+\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
+    \def\righttext{#2}%
+  \else
+    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
+    \def\righttext{#1}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno
+    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
+  \else
+    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
+  \fi
+  \temp
+}
+
+% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
+%
+\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
+\def\includezzz#1{%
+  \pushthisfilestack
+  \def\thisfile{#1}%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \def\temp{\input #1 }%
+    \expandafter
+  }\temp
+  \popthisfilestack
+}
+\def\filenamecatcodes{%
+  \catcode\\=\other
+  \catcode~=\other
+  \catcode^=\other
+  \catcode_=\other
+  \catcode|=\other
+  \catcode<=\other
+  \catcode>=\other
+  \catcode+=\other
+  \catcode-=\other
+}
+
+\def\pushthisfilestack{%
+  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
+  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
+  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
+}
+
+\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
+\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
+  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
+
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line
+% outputs that line, centered.
+%
+\parseargdef\center{%
+  \ifhmode
+    \let\next\centerH
+  \else
+    \let\next\centerV
+  \fi
+  \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+}
+\def\centerH#1{%
+  {%
+    \hfil\break
+    \line{#1}%
+    \break
+  }%
+}
+\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
+
+% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
+
+\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
+
+\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode\^^M=\other%
address@hidden \catcode\{=\other \catcode\}=\other%
+\commentxxx}
+{\catcode\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+
+\let\c=\comment
+
+% @paragraphindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
+% NCHARS can also be the word asis' or none'.
+% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
+%
+\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
+\def\noneword{none}
+%
+\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\asisword
+  \else
+    \ifx\temp\noneword
+      \defaultparindent = 0pt
+    \else
+      \defaultparindent = #1em
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+}
+
+% @exampleindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
+% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
+% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
+\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\asisword
+  \else
+    \ifx\temp\noneword
+      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
+    \else
+      \lispnarrowing = #1em
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @firstparagraphindent WORD
+% If WORD is none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
+% after a section heading.  If WORD is insert', then do indent at such
+% paragraphs.
+%
+% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
+% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
+% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
+% By default, we suppress indentation.
+%
+\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\def\insertword{insert}
+%
+\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\noneword
+    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
+  \else\ifx\temp\insertword
+    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option \temp'}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
+% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
+%
+% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
+% paragraph.
+%
+\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
+  \gdef\indent{%
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+    \indent
+  }%
+  \gdef\noindent{%
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+    \noindent
+  }%
+  \global\everypar = {%
+    \kern -\parindent
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+  }%
+}
+
+\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
+  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
+  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
+  \global \everypar = {}%
+}
+
+
+% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
+%
+% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
+% an actual _ character, as in @address@hidden + 1}.  So make
+% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
+% which is what @var uses.
+{
+  \catcode\underChar = \active
+  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
+    \catcode\underChar=\active
+    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
+  }
+}
+% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
+% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
+% this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
+% otherwise define @\.
+%
+% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
+\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
+%
+\def\math{%
+  \tex
+  \mathunderscore
+  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
+  \mathactive
+  $\finishmath +} +\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
+
+% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
+% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
+% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
+%
+{
+  \catcode^ = \active
+  \catcode< = \active
+  \catcode> = \active
+  \catcode+ = \active
+  \gdef\mathactive{%
+    \let^ = \ptexhat
+    \let< = \ptexless
+    \let> = \ptexgtr
+    \let+ = \ptexplus
+  }
+}
+
+% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
+\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
+\def\minus{$-$}
+
+% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
+% font as three actual period characters.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 1.5em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil
+    .\hfil.\hfil.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil
+  }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+  \dots
+  \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
+}
+
+% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
+% Texinfo's parsing.
+%
+\let\comma = ,
+
+% @refill is a no-op.
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
+%
+
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+\def\setfilename{%
+   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow \input texinfo'.
+     \tryauxfile
+     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
+   \openindices
+   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+   %
+   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
+   \closein 1
+   %
+   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+}
+
+% Called from \setfilename.
+%
+\def\openindices{%
+  \newindex{cp}%
+  \newcodeindex{fn}%
+  \newcodeindex{vr}%
+  \newcodeindex{tp}%
+  \newcodeindex{ky}%
+  \newcodeindex{pg}%
+}
+
+% @bye.
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+
+\message{pdf,}
+% adobe portable' document format
+\newcount\tempnum
+\newcount\lnkcount
+\newtoks\filename
+\newcount\filenamelength
+\newcount\pgn
+\newtoks\toksA
+\newtoks\toksB
+\newtoks\toksC
+\newtoks\toksD
+\newbox\boxA
+\newcount\countA
+\newif\ifpdf
+\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
+
+% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
+% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
+% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
+\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+\else
+  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
+  \else
+    \ifcase\pdfoutput
+    \else
+      \pdftrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, to
+% for display in the outlines, and in other places.  Thus, we have to
+% double any backslashes.  Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
+% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e.  Not good.
+% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
+% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
+% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
+% that's we do).
+
+% double active backslashes.
+%
+}
+
+% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
+% not active characters.  hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
+% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens.  I've
+% tinkered with it a little for texinfo, but it's definitely from there.
+%
+% #1 is the tokens to replace.
+% #2 is the replacement.
+% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
+%
+\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
+  \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
+    ##1%
+    \ifx\\##2\\%
+    \else
+      #2%
+      \HyReturnAfterFi{%
+        \HyPsdReplace##2\END
+      }%
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
+}
+\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+
+% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
+\def\backslashparens#1{%
+  \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
+             % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
+  \HyPsdSubst{(}{\backslashlparen}{#1}%
+  \HyPsdSubst{)}{\backslashrparen}{#1}%
+}
+
+{\catcode\exclamChar = 0 \catcode\backChar = \other
+ !gdef!backslashlparen{$$}% + !gdef!backslashrparen{$$}%
+}
+
+\ifpdf
+  \input pdfcolor
+  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
+  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
+    \def\imagewidth{#2}%
+    \def\imageheight{#3}%
+    % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
+    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
+    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+      \immediate\pdfimage
+    \else
+      \immediate\pdfximage
+    \fi
+      \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
+      \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
+      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
+         #1.pdf%
+       \else
+         {#1.pdf}%
+       \fi
+    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
+      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
+    \fi}
+  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
+    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
+    % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
+    \atdummies
+    \activebackslashdouble
+    \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
+    \backslashparens\pdfdestname
+    \pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz%
+  }}%
+  %
+  % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
+  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}%
+  %
+  \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
+  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
+  % come from Petr Olsak
+  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
+    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
+  %
+  % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
+  % outline by the pdf viewer.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
+  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node text,
+  % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
+  % #4 is the page number
+  %
+  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
+    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
+    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
+    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
+    % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
+    \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
+      \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
+    \else
+      % Doubled backslashes in the name.
+      {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+       \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
+    {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
+     \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
+    %
+    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
+  }
+  %
+  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
+    \begingroup
+      % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
+      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
+      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
+      %
+      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
+      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+       \def\thischapnum{##2}%
+       \def\thissecnum{0}%
+       \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+       \def\thissecnum{##2}%
+       \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+       \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+      }%
+      \def\thischapnum{0}%
+      \def\thissecnum{0}%
+      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      %
+      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
+      % al. a second time, below.
+      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
+      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
+      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+      %
+      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
+      % The -' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
+      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
+      %
+      % We use the node names as the destinations.
+      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
+      %
+      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
+      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
+      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
+      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
+      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
+      %
+      % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
+      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right
+      % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
+      \indexnofonts
+      \setupdatafile
+      \activebackslash
+      \input \jobname.toc
+    \endgroup
+  }
+  %
+  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
+    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
+    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \nextsp}
+  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
+  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+  \else
+  \fi
+  \def\pdfurl#1{%
+    \begingroup
+      \makevalueexpandable
+      \leavevmode\Red
+      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
+    \endgroup}
+  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
+  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
+  \def\maketoks{%
+    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
+    \else
+      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
+        \let\next=\maketoks
+      \fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \next}
+    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
+  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
+\else
+  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
+  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
+  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
+\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
+
+
+\message{fonts,}
+
+% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
+% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @address@hidden prints foo in
+% italics, not bold italics.
+%
+\def\setfontstyle#1{%
+  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
+  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
+}
+
+% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
+%
+\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
+
+\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
+\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
+\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
+\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
+\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
+
+% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+
+% We don't need math for this font style.
+\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
+
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
+  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+  \normalbaselines
+  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+  }%
+}
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
+% specified font prefix (normally cm').
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
+
+% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\def\fontprefix{cm}
+\fi
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+\def\rmshape{r}
+\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
+\def\bfshape{b}
+\def\bxshape{bx}
+\def\ttshape{tt}
+\def\ttbshape{tt}
+\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+\def\itshape{ti}
+\def\itbshape{bxti}
+\def\slshape{sl}
+\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+\def\sfshape{ss}
+\def\sfbshape{ss}
+\def\scshape{csc}
+\def\scbshape{csc}
+
+% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
+\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
+\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+
+% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
+\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
+\font\smalli=cmmi9
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+
+% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
+\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
+\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
+\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
+\font\smalleri=cmmi8
+\font\smallersy=cmsy8
+
+% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
+\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+\def\authortt{\sectt}
+
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+
+% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+
+% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
+\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
+\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
+\font\reducedi=cmmi10
+\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
+% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+  \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
+  \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
+  \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
+}
+
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
+% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
+% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
+%
+% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
+% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
+% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
+%
+% This all needs generalizing, badly.
+%
+\def\textfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{text}%
+  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+\def\titlefonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
+  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
+  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
+  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+  \def\curfontsize{title}%
+  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
+\def\chapfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{chap}%
+  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
+\def\secfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{sec}%
+  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
+\def\subsecfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
+  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
+\def\reducedfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
+  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
+  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
+  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+\def\smallfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
+  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
+  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{small}%
+  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+\def\smallerfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
+  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
+  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
+  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
+  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+
+% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
+\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
+
+% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
+% can fit this many characters:
+%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
+% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
+%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
+% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
+% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
+%
+% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
+%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
+%
+% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
+% --karl, 24jan03.
+
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\textfonts \rm
+
+% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
+\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}  % no cmb12
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
+                    \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
+% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
+\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
+% ttsl for book titles, do we?
+\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\slanted=\smartslanted
+\let\var=\smartslanted
+\let\dfn=\smartslanted
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+
+% @b, explicit bold.
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% @sansserif, explicit sans.
+\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = - }
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the \x notation, and
+% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
+%
+  \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
+    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
+  }
+  \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
+    \sfcode\.3000\sfcode\?3000\sfcode\!3000
+    \sfcode\:2000\sfcode\;1500\sfcode\,1250
+    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
+  }
+\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
+
+\def\t#1{%
+  {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
+  \null
+}
+\def\samp#1{\tclose{#1}'\null}
+\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\font\keysy=cmsy9
+\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+% The old definition, with no lozenge:
+%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
+\let\file=\samp
+\let\option=\samp
+
+% @code is a modification of @t,
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+  {%
+    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+    %
+    % Switch to typewriter.
+    \tt
+    %
+    % But \ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+    %
+    % Turn off hyphenation.
+    \nohyphenation
+    %
+    \rawbackslash
+    \plainfrenchspacing
+    #1%
+  }%
+  \null
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at -' and _' in @code.
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
+%  -- rms.
+{
+  \catcode\-=\active
+  \catcode\_=\active
+  %
+  \global\def\code{\begingroup
+    \catcode\-=\active  \catcode\_=\active
+    \ifallowcodebreaks
+     \let-\codedash
+     \let_\codeunder
+    \else
+     \let-\realdash
+     \let_\realunder
+    \fi
+    \codex
+  }
+}
+
+\def\realdash{-}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{%
+  % this is all so @address@hidden can work.  In math mode, _
+  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
+  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
+  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
+  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
+               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
+             \else\normalunderscore \fi
+             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
+            {\_}%
+}
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
+% each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is undesirable in
+% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
+% general.  @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
+%
+\newif\ifallowcodebreaks  \allowcodebreakstrue
+
+\def\keywordtrue{true}
+\def\keywordfalse{false}
+
+\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
+  \def\txiarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
+    \allowcodebreakstrue
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
+    \allowcodebreaksfalse
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option \txiarg'}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+%   example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+%   or code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
+  \def\txiarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option \txiarg'}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is distinct.'
+\kbdinputstyle distinct
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
+
+% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\indicateurl=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\command=\code
+
+% @uref (abbreviation for urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
+% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
+% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
+% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
+% a hypertex \special here.
+%
+\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
+\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
+  \unsepspaces
+  \pdfurl{#1}%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
+  \else
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+      \ifpdf
+        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
+      \else
+        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\endgroup}
+
+% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
+%
+\let\url=\uref
+
+% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
+%
+%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
+\ifpdf
+  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
+  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
+    \unsepspaces
+    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
+  \endgroup}
+\else
+  \let\email=\uref
+\fi
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., in' or pt'.  The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
+
+% @l was never documented to mean switch to the Lisp font'',
+% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
+% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
+%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
+
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
+
+% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
+% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
+% all-uppercase.
+%
+\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
+\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
+% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
+%
+\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
+\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
+%
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}} + +% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. +% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik +% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and +% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). +% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. +% +% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore +% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular +% font height. +% +% feymr - regular +% feymo - slanted +% feybr - bold +% feybo - bold slanted +% +% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. +% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. +% Hmm. +% +% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? +% Hope not. +% +% +\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} +\def\eurofont{% + % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in + % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that + % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the + % font installed. + % + % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale + % that to the current nominal size. + % + % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but + % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. + % + \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% + % + \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename + % bold: + \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize + \else + % regular: + \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize + \fi + \thiseurofont +} + +% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really +% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. +% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. +% +\def\registeredsymbol{% +$^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
+               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
+    }% +} + +% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: +% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 +% so we'll define it if necessary. +% +\ifx\Orb\undefined +\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} +\fi + + +\message{page headings,} + +\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in +\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc + +% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. +\newif\ifseenauthor +\newif\iffinishedtitlepage + +% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the +% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. +% +\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage + \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue +\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage + \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue + +\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% + \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} + +\envdef\titlepage{% + % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. + \begingroup + \parindent=0pt \textfonts + % Leave some space at the very top of the page. + \vglue\titlepagetopglue + % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. + \finishedtitlepagetrue + % + % Most title pages'' are actually two pages long, with space + % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. + \let\oldpage = \page + \def\page{% + \iffinishedtitlepage\else + \finishtitlepage + \fi + \let\page = \oldpage + \page + \null + }% +} + +\def\Etitlepage{% + \iffinishedtitlepage\else + \finishtitlepage + \fi + % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, + % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. + % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page + % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. + \oldpage + \endgroup + % + % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are + % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. + \HEADINGSon + % + % If they want short, they certainly want long too. + \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage + \shortcontents + \contents + \global\let\shortcontents = \relax + \global\let\contents = \relax + \fi + % + \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage + \contents + \global\let\contents = \relax + \global\let\shortcontents = \relax + \fi +} + +\def\finishtitlepage{% + \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize + \vskip\titlepagebottomglue + \finishedtitlepagetrue +} + +%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: + +\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm +\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} + +\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines + \let\tt=\authortt} + +\parseargdef\title{% + \checkenv\titlepage + \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1} + % print a rule at the page bottom also. + \finishedtitlepagefalse + \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt +} + +\parseargdef\subtitle{% + \checkenv\titlepage + {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% +} + +% @author should come last, but may come many times. +% It can also be used inside @quotation. +% +\parseargdef\author{% + \def\temp{\quotation}% + \ifx\thisenv\temp + \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. + \else + \checkenv\titlepage + \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi + {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}% + \fi +} + + +%%% Set up page headings and footings. + +\let\thispage=\folio + +\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages +\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages +\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages +\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages + +% Now make TeX use those variables +\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline + \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} +\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline + \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} +\let\HEADINGShook=\relax + +% Commands to set those variables. +% For example, this is what @headings on does +% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter +% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle +% @evenfooting @thisfile|| +% @oddfooting ||@thisfile + + +\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} +\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} +\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% +\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} + +\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} +\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} +\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% +\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} + +\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% + +\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} +\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} +\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% +\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} + +\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} +\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} +\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% + \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% + % + % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume + % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. + \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip + \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip +} + +\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} + + +% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. +% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. +% @headings off turns them off. +% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. +% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. +% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. +% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. +% By default, they are off at the start of a document, +% and turned on' after @end titlepage. + +\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} + +\def\HEADINGSoff{% +\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} +\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} +\HEADINGSoff +% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. +% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, +% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document +% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top +% edge of all pages. +\def\HEADINGSdouble{% +\global\pageno=1 +\global\evenfootline={\hfil} +\global\oddfootline={\hfil} +\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage +} +\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager + +% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, +% page number on top right. +\def\HEADINGSsingle{% +\global\pageno=1 +\global\evenfootline={\hfil} +\global\oddfootline={\hfil} +\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager +} +\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} + +\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} +\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter +\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% +\global\evenfootline={\hfil} +\global\oddfootline={\hfil} +\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage +} + +\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} +\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% +\global\evenfootline={\hfil} +\global\oddfootline={\hfil} +\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager +} + +% Subroutines used in generating headings +% This produces Day Month Year style of output. +% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set +% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). +\ifx\today\undefined +\def\today{% + \number\day\space + \ifcase\month + \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr + \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug + \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec + \fi + \space\number\year} +\fi + +% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. +% It generates no output of its own. +\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} +\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} + + +\message{tables,} +% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). + +% default indentation of table text +\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in +% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text +\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in +% margin between end of table item and start of table text. +\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in + +% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin +\newdimen\itemmax + +% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with +% these defs. +% They also define \itemindex +% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). + +\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip + +\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} + +\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} +\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} + +\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % + \advance\hsize by -\rightskip + \advance\hsize by -\tableindent + \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% + \itemindex{#1}% + \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. + % + % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line + % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that + % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next + % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the + % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. + \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax + % + % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, + % but leave it ragged-right. + \begingroup + \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent + \advance\hsize by\tableindent + \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil + \leavevmode\unhbox0\par + \endgroup + % + % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the + % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. + \nobreak \vskip-\parskip + % + % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if + % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no + % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would + % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this + % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert + % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. + % + \penalty 10001 + \endgroup + \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse + \else + % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the + % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. + \noindent + % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in + % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and + % eventually be printed. + \nobreak\kern-\tableindent + \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 + \unhbox0 + \nobreak\kern\dimen0 + \endgroup + \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue + \fi +} + address@hidden while not in a list environment}} address@hidden while not in a list environment}} + +% @table, @ftable, @vtable. +\envdef\table{% + \let\itemindex\gobble + \tablecheck{table}% +} +\envdef\ftable{% + \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% + \tablecheck{ftable}% +} +\envdef\vtable{% + \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% + \tablecheck{vtable}% +} +\def\tablecheck#1{% + \ifnum \the\catcode\^^M=\active + \endgroup + \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is + that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% + \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% + \else + \let\next\tablex + \fi + \next +} +\def\tablex#1{% + \def\itemindicate{#1}% + \parsearg\tabley +} +\def\tabley#1{% + {% + \makevalueexpandable + \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% + \expandafter + }\temp \endtablez +} +\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% + \aboveenvbreak + \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi + \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi + \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi + \itemmax=\tableindent + \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin + \advance \leftskip by \tableindent + \exdentamount=\tableindent + \parindent = 0pt + \parskip = \smallskipamount + \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi + \let\item = \internalBitem + \let\itemx = \internalBitemx +} +\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} +\let\Eftable\Etable +\let\Evtable\Etable +\let\Eitemize\Etable +\let\Eenumerate\Etable + +% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize + +\newcount \itemno + +\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} + +\def\doitemize#1{% + \aboveenvbreak + \itemmax=\itemindent + \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin + \advance\leftskip by \itemindent + \exdentamount=\itemindent + \parindent=0pt + \parskip=\smallskipamount + \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi + \def\itemcontents{#1}% + % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. + \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi + \let\item=\itemizeitem +} + +% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. +% +\def\itemizeitem{% + \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations + {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break + {% + % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a + % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have + % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero + % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the + % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there + % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much + % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least + % that's the theory. + \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi + \noindent + \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% + \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. + \flushcr +} + +% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in +% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. +% +\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% + +% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, +% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No +% argument is the same as 1'. +% +\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} +\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% + % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given 1'. + \def\thearg{#1}% + \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi + % + % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a + % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. + % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. + % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at + % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) + \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark + \ifx\rest\empty + % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. + % A lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. + % An uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and + % not equal to itself. + % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. + % + % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from + % continuing to look for a <number>. + % + \ifnum\lccode\expandafter\thearg=0\relax + \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) + \else + % It's a letter. + \ifnum\lccode\expandafter\thearg=\expandafter\thearg\relax + \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter + \else + \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter + \fi + \fi + \else + % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. + \numericenumerate + \fi +} + +% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is +% given in \thearg. +% +\def\numericenumerate{% + \itemno = \thearg + \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% +} + +% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. +\def\lowercaseenumerate{% + \itemno = \expandafter\thearg + \startenumeration{% + % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. + \ifnum\itemno=0 + \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger + alphabet}% + \fi + \char\lccode\itemno + }% +} + +% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. +\def\uppercaseenumerate{% + \itemno = \expandafter\thearg + \startenumeration{% + % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. + \ifnum\itemno=0 + \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger + alphabet} + \fi + \char\uccode\itemno + }% +} + +% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the +% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in +% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. +% +\def\startenumeration#1{% + \advance\itemno by -1 + \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr +} + +% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg +% to @enumerate. +% +\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} +\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} +\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} +\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} + + +% @multitable macros +% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 +% +% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. +% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width +% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, +% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. + +% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. + +% To make preamble: +% +% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: +% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 +% @item ... +% +% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total +% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many +% columns as desired. + + +% Or use a template: +% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} +% @item ... +% using the widest term desired in each column. + +% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column +% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's +% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, +% ie, @address@hidden@tab will produce two empty columns. + +% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt +% if they are. + +% Sample multitable: + +% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} +% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col +% @item +% first col stuff +% @tab +% second col stuff +% @tab +% third col +% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff +% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. +% +% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. +% @address@hidden@tab This will be in third column. +% @end multitable + +% Default dimensions may be reset by user. +% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. +% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. +% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. +% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline +% to baseline. +% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. +% +\newskip\multitableparskip +\newskip\multitableparindent +\newdimen\multitablecolspace +\newskip\multitablelinespace +\multitableparskip=0pt +\multitableparindent=6pt +\multitablecolspace=12pt +\multitablelinespace=0pt + +% Macros used to set up halign preamble: +% +\let\endsetuptable\relax +\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} +\let\columnfractions\relax +\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} +\newif\ifsetpercent + +% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might +% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. +% +\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% + \global\advance\colcount by 1 + \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% + \setuptable +} + +\newcount\colcount +\def\setuptable#1{% + \def\firstarg{#1}% + \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable + \let\go = \relax + \else + \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions + \global\setpercenttrue + \else + \ifsetpercent + \let\go\pickupwholefraction + \else + \global\advance\colcount by 1 + \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a + % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. + \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% + \fi + \fi + \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction + % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so + % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. + \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% + \else + \let\go = \setuptable + \fi% + \fi + \go +} + +% multitable-only commands. +% +% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. +% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group +% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. +\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% +% +% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template +% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just &' until +% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. +% --karl, address@hidden, 20apr99. +\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% + +% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: +% +\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. +% +\envdef\multitable{% + \vskip\parskip + \startsavinginserts + % + % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. + % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries + % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka + % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. + \def\item{\crcr}% + % + \tolerance=9500 + \hbadness=9500 + \setmultitablespacing + \parskip=\multitableparskip + \parindent=\multitableparindent + \overfullrule=0pt + \global\colcount=0 + % + \everycr = {% + \noalign{% + \global\everytab={}% + \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. + % Check for saved footnotes, etc. + \checkinserts + % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. + %\filbreak + % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the + % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the + % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. + }% + }% + % + \parsearg\domultitable +} +\def\domultitable#1{% + % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: + \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable + % + % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will + % be used as many times as user calls for columns. + % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and + % continue for many paragraphs if desired. + \halign\bgroup &% + \global\advance\colcount by 1 + \multistrut + \vtop{% + % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: + \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname + % + % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other + % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after + % the first one. + % + % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace + % to the width of each template entry. + % + % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will + % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip + % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at + % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. + % + % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. + \rightskip=0pt + \ifnum\colcount=1 + % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. + \advance\hsize by\leftskip + \else + \ifsetpercent \else + % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize + % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. + \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace + \fi + % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: + \leftskip=\multitablecolspace + \fi + % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious + % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the + % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. + % For example: + % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 + % @item @code{#} + % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. + % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively + % marking characters. + \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut + }\cr +} +\def\Emultitable{% + \crcr + \egroup % end the \halign + \global\setpercentfalse +} + +\def\setmultitablespacing{% + \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing + % + % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in + % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on + % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. + % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. +\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt +\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip +\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 +\fi +%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of +%% table. If not, do nothing. +%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. +\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace +\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace +\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller + %% than skip between lines in the table. +\fi% +\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt +\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace +\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller + %% than skip between lines in the table. +\fi} + + +\message{conditionals,} + +% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, +% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't +% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we +% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't +% attempt to close an environment group. +% +\def\makecond#1{% + \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax + \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 +} +\makecond{iftex} +\makecond{ifnotdocbook} +\makecond{ifnothtml} +\makecond{ifnotinfo} +\makecond{ifnotplaintext} +\makecond{ifnotxml} + +% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. +% +\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} +\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} +\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} +\def\html{\doignore{html}} +\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} +\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} +\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} +\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} +\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} +\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} +\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} +\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} +\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} + +% Ignore text until a line address@hidden #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. +% +% A count to remember the depth of nesting. +\newcount\doignorecount + +\def\doignore#1{\begingroup + % Scan in verbatim'' mode: + \catcode\@ = \other + \catcode\{ = \other + \catcode\} = \other + % + % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. + \spaceisspace + % + % Count number of #1's that we've seen. + \doignorecount = 0 + % + % Swallow text until we reach the matching address@hidden #1'. + \dodoignore{#1}% +} + +{ \catcode_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. + \obeylines % + % + \gdef\dodoignore#1{% + % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., ifinfo'. + % + % Define a command to find the next address@hidden #1', which must be on a line + % by itself. + address@hidden address@hidden + % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a + % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line address@hidden @ifset', for + % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) + address@hidden + % + % And now expand that command. + \obeylines % + \doignoretext ^^M% + }% +} + +\def\doignoreyyy#1{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. + \let\next\doignoretextzzz + \else % Found a nested condition, ... + \advance\doignorecount by 1 + \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. + % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). + \fi + \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. +} + +% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". +% +\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% + \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. + \let\next\enddoignore + \else % Still inside a nested condition. + \advance\doignorecount by -1 + \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. + \fi + \next +} + +% Finish off ignored text. +\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces} + + +% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. +% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. +% +% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be +% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our +% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we +% didn't need it. +% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode\ =10. +% +\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} +\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% + {% + \makevalueexpandable + \def\temp{#2}% + \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% + \ifx\temp\empty + \next{}% + \else + \setzzz#2\endsetzzz + \fi + }% +} +% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. +\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} + +% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. +% +\parseargdef\clear{% + {% + \makevalueexpandable + \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax + }% +} + +% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. +\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} +\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} +{ + \catcode\- = \active \catcode\_ = \active + % + \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% + \let\value = \expandablevalue + % We don't want these characters active, ... + \catcode\-=\other \catcode\_=\other + % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if + % we're called from @code, as @address@hidden, though. + % So \let them to their normal equivalents. + \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore + } +} + +% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's +% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). +% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since +% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the +% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain +% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work +% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). +% +\def\expandablevalue#1{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax + {[No value for #1'']}% + \message{Variable #1', used in @value, is not set.}% + \else + \csname SET#1\endcsname + \fi +} + +% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the ...' iff VAR has been defined +% with @set. +% +% To get special treatment of address@hidden ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. +% +\makecond{ifset} +\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} +\def\doifset#1#2{% + {% + \makevalueexpandable + \let\next=\empty + \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax + #1% If not set, redefine \next. + \fi + \expandafter + }\next +} +\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} + +% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the ...' iff VAR has never been +% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. +% +% The \else' inside the \doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the +% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, +% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. +% +\makecond{ifclear} +\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} +\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} + +% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file +% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. +\let\dircategory=\comment + +% @defininfoenclose. +\let\definfoenclose=\comment + + +\message{indexing,} +% Index generation facilities + +% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite +% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. +\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} + +% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. +% It automatically defines \fooindex such that +% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. +% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for +% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. +% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long +% for the sake of vms. +% +\def\newindex#1{% + \iflinks + \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname + \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file + \fi + \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index + \noexpand\doindex{#1}} +} + +% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} +% +\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} + +% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. +% +\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} +% +\def\newcodeindex#1{% + \iflinks + \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname + \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 + \fi + \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% + \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% +} + + +% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. +% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. +% +% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo +% inside @code. +% +\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} +\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} + +% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), +% #3 the target index (bar). +\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% + % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up + % closing the target index. + \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined + % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the + % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. + \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname + \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 + \fi + % redefine \fooindfile: + \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname + \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp + % redefine \fooindex: + \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% +} + +% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. +% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, +% and it is "foo", the name of the index. + +% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. +% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. + +% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} +% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. + +\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} +\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} + +% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. +\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} +\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} + +% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. +% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, +% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. +% +\def\indexdummies{% + \escapechar = \\ % use backslash in output files. + address@hidden@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. + \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% + % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. + % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes + % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. + \let\{ = \mylbrace + \let\} = \myrbrace + % + % Do the redefinitions. + \commondummies +} + +% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to +% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of +% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, +% this will be simpler. +% +\def\atdummies{% + address@hidden@@}% + \def\ {@ }% + \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd + \let\} = \rbraceatcmd + % + % Do the redefinitions. + \commondummies +} + +% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. +% +\def\commondummies{% + % + % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively + % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, + % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for + % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word + % from whatever follows. + % + % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the + % space. + % + % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and + % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then + % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). + % + \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% + \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% + \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter + % + \commondummiesnofonts + % + \definedummyletter\_% + % + % Non-English letters. + \definedummyword\AA + \definedummyword\AE + \definedummyword\L + \definedummyword\OE + \definedummyword\O + \definedummyword\aa + \definedummyword\ae + \definedummyword\l + \definedummyword\oe + \definedummyword\o + \definedummyword\ss + \definedummyword\exclamdown + \definedummyword\questiondown + \definedummyword\ordf + \definedummyword\ordm + % + % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. + \definedummyword\bf + \definedummyword\gtr + \definedummyword\hat + \definedummyword\less + \definedummyword\sf + \definedummyword\sl + \definedummyword\tclose + \definedummyword\tt + % + \definedummyword\LaTeX + \definedummyword\TeX + % + % Assorted special characters. + \definedummyword\bullet + \definedummyword\comma + \definedummyword\copyright + \definedummyword\registeredsymbol + \definedummyword\dots + \definedummyword\enddots + \definedummyword\equiv + \definedummyword\error + \definedummyword\euro + \definedummyword\expansion + \definedummyword\minus + \definedummyword\pounds + \definedummyword\point + \definedummyword\print + \definedummyword\result + % + % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. + \macrolist + % + \normalturnoffactive + % + % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any + % (non-fully-expandable) commands. + \makevalueexpandable +} + +% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. +% +% Better have this without active chars. +{ + \catcode\~=\other + \gdef\commondummiesnofonts{% + % Control letters and accents. + \definedummyletter\!% + \definedummyaccent\"% + \definedummyaccent\'% + \definedummyletter\*% + \definedummyaccent\,% + \definedummyletter\.% + \definedummyletter\/% + \definedummyletter\:% + \definedummyaccent\=% + \definedummyletter\?% + \definedummyaccent\^% + \definedummyaccent\% + \definedummyaccent\~% + \definedummyword\u + \definedummyword\v + \definedummyword\H + \definedummyword\dotaccent + \definedummyword\ringaccent + \definedummyword\tieaccent + \definedummyword\ubaraccent + \definedummyword\udotaccent + \definedummyword\dotless + % + % Texinfo font commands. + \definedummyword\b + \definedummyword\i + \definedummyword\r + \definedummyword\sc + \definedummyword\t + % + % Commands that take arguments. + \definedummyword\acronym + \definedummyword\cite + \definedummyword\code + \definedummyword\command + \definedummyword\dfn + \definedummyword\emph + \definedummyword\env + \definedummyword\file + \definedummyword\kbd + \definedummyword\key + \definedummyword\math + \definedummyword\option + \definedummyword\samp + \definedummyword\strong + \definedummyword\tie + \definedummyword\uref + \definedummyword\url + \definedummyword\var + \definedummyword\verb + \definedummyword\w + } +} + +% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index +% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all +% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string +% would be for a given command (usually its argument). +% +\def\indexnofonts{% + % Accent commands should become @asis. + \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% + % We can just ignore other control letters. + \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% + % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. + \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent + % + \commondummiesnofonts + % + % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command + % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. + % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. + %\let\tt=\asis + % + \def\ { }% + address@hidden@}% + % how to handle braces? + \def\_{\normalunderscore}% + % + % Non-English letters. + \def\AA{AA}% + \def\AE{AE}% + \def\L{L}% + \def\OE{OE}% + \def\O{O}% + \def\aa{aa}% + \def\ae{ae}% + \def\l{l}% + \def\oe{oe}% + \def\o{o}% + \def\ss{ss}% + \def\exclamdown{!}% + \def\questiondown{?}% + \def\ordf{a}% + \def\ordm{o}% + % + \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% + \def\TeX{TeX}% + % + % Assorted special characters. + % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) + \def\bullet{bullet}% + \def\comma{,}% + \def\copyright{copyright}% + \def\registeredsymbol{R}% + \def\dots{...}% + \def\enddots{...}% + \def\equiv{==}% + \def\error{error}% + \def\euro{euro}% + \def\expansion{==>}% + \def\minus{-}% + \def\pounds{pounds}% + \def\point{.}% + \def\print{-|}% + \def\result{=>}% + % + % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). + % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. + % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up + % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry + % that starts with \. + % + % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them + % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that + % goes to end-of-line is not handled. + % + \macrolist +} + +\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. +\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? + +% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. +% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. +\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} + +% Workhorse for all \fooindexes. +% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- +% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception +% is with most defuns, which call us directly). +% +\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% + \iflinks + {% + % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). + \toks0 = {#2}% + % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. + \def\thirdarg{#3}% + \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else + \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% + \fi + % + \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% + % + \ifvmode + \dosubindsanitize + \else + \dosubindwrite + \fi + }% + \fi +} + +% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: +% +\def\dosubindwrite{% + % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. + \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else + \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% + \fi + % + % Remember, we are within a group. + \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage + \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now + % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. + % + % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to + % get the string to sort by. + {\indexnofonts + \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion + \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% + }% + % + % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and + % the original text, including any font commands. We write + % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the + % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s + % sorted result. + \edef\temp{% + \write\writeto{% + \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% + }% + \temp +} + +% Take care of unwanted page breaks: +% +% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it +% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting +% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the +% \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences +% like this: +% @end defun +% @tindex whatever +% @defun ... +% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the +% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of +% the previous defun. +% +% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We +% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. +% +% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. +% +% But wait, there is a catch there: +% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not +% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts +% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual +% representation of the skip. +% +% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that +% the p'' and t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). +% +\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname address@hidden +% +% ..., ready, GO: +% +\def\dosubindsanitize{% + % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. + \skip0 = \lastskip + \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% + \count255 = \lastpenalty + % + % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a + % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this + % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a + % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential + % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. + \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro + \else + \vskip-\skip0 + \fi + % + \dosubindwrite + % + \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro + % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and + % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want + % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various + % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any + % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: + % + % @deffn deffn-whatever + % @vindex index-whatever + % Description. + % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit + % and the "Description." paragraph. + \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi + \else + % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, + % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item + % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. + \nobreak\vskip\skip0 + \fi +} + +% The index entry written in the file actually looks like +% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} +% or +% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} +% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files +% containing these kinds of lines: +% \initial {c} +% before the first topic whose initial is c +% \entry {topic}{pagelist} +% for a topic that is used without subtopics +% \primary {topic} +% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics +% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} +% for each subtopic. + +% Define the user-accessible indexing commands +% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. + +\def\findex {\fnindex} +\def\kindex {\kyindex} +\def\cindex {\cpindex} +\def\vindex {\vrindex} +\def\tindex {\tpindex} +\def\pindex {\pgindex} + +\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} +{\obeylines % +\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % +\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} + +% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. + +% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. +% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). +% +\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup + \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% + % + \smallfonts \rm + \tolerance = 9500 + \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. + % + % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. + % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains + % \initial address@hidden + % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces + % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). + \catcode\@ = 11 + \openin 1 \jobname.#1s + \ifeof 1 + % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, + % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the + % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure + % there is some text. + \putwordIndexNonexistent + \else + % + % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof + % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so + % it can discover if there is anything in it. + \read 1 to \temp + \ifeof 1 + \putwordIndexIsEmpty + \else + % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape + % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change + % to make right now. + \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% + \catcode\\ = 0 + \escapechar = \\ + \begindoublecolumns + \input \jobname.#1s + \enddoublecolumns + \fi + \fi + \closein 1 +\endgroup} + +% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. +% Change them to control the appearance of the index. + +\def\initial#1{{% + % Some minor font changes for the special characters. + \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt + % + % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. + \removelastskip + % + % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. + \nobreak + \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip + \penalty 0 + \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip + % + % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of + % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column + % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch + % we need before each entry, but it's better. + % + % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. + \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip + \leftline{\secbf #1}% + % Do our best not to break after the initial. + \nobreak + \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip +}} + +% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and +% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index +% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. +% +% A straightforward implementation would start like this: +% \def\entry#1#2{... +% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to +% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- +% -'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. +% +% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. +% --kasal, 21nov03 +\def\entry{% + \begingroup + % + % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't + % affect previous text. + \par + % + % Do not fill out the last line with white space. + \parfillskip = 0in + % + % No extra space above this paragraph. + \parskip = 0in + % + % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. + \finalhyphendemerits = 0 + % + % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number + % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the + % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large + % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across + % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. + % + % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start + % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. + \hangindent = 2em + % + % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line + % with blank space. + \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil + % + % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing + % columns. + \vskip 0pt plus1pt + % + % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): + \afterassignment\doentry + \let\temp = +} +\def\doentry{% + \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. + \noindent + \aftergroup\finishentry + % And now comes the text of the entry. +} +\def\finishentry#1{% + % #1 is the page number. + % + % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if + % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be + % cursed by a Unix daemon. + \def\tempa{{\rm }}% + \def\tempb{#1}% + \edef\tempc{\tempa}% + \edef\tempd{\tempb}% + \ifx\tempc\tempd + \ % + \else + % + % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out + % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the + % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) + \hfil\penalty50 + \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. + % + % The \ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as + % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull + % \hbox ensues. + \ifpdf + \pdfgettoks#1.% + \ \the\toksA + \else + \ #1% + \fi + \fi + \par + \endgroup +} + +% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em. +\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders + \hbox{\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} + +\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} + +\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm +\def\secondary#1#2{{% + \parfillskip=0in + \parskip=0in + \hangindent=1in + \hangafter=1 + \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill + \ifpdf + \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. + \else + #2 + \fi + \par +}} + +% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. +% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, +% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. address@hidden + +\newbox\partialpage +\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize + +\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns + % Grab any single-column material above us. + \output = {% + % + % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a + % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output + % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is + % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In + % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal + % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this + % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. + \ifvoid\partialpage \else + \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% + \fi + % + \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% + % Unvbox the main output page. + \unvbox\PAGE + \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip + }% + }% + \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage + % + % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. + \output = {\doublecolumnout}% + % + % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this + % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 + % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple + % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the + % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. + % + % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between + % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it + % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant + % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) + % as it did when we hard-coded it. + % + % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we + % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) + % been clobbered. + % + \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize + \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize + \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 + \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize + % + % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, + % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) + \vsize = 2\vsize +} + +% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except +% the last. +% +\def\doublecolumnout{% + \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth + % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal + % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the + % previous page. + \dimen@ = \vsize + \divide\dimen@ by 2 + \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage + % + % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. + \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ + \onepageout\pagesofar + \unvbox255 + \penalty\outputpenalty +} +% +% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, +% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. +\def\pagesofar{% + \unvbox\partialpage + % + \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize + \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize + \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% +} +% +% All done with double columns. +\def\enddoublecolumns{% + \output = {% + % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the + % current page, no automatic page break. + \balancecolumns + % + % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, + % though, there will be another page break right after this \output + % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not + % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal + % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be + % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes + % the output somewhat more palatable.) + \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% + }% + \eject + \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns + % + % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted + % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column + % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the + % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). + \pagegoal = \vsize +} +% +% Called at the end of the double column material. +\def\balancecolumns{% + \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. + \dimen@ = \ht0 + \advance\dimen@ by \topskip + \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip + \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to + %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, address@hidden + \splittopskip = \topskip + % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. + {% + \vbadness = 10000 + \loop + \global\setbox3 = \copy0 + \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ + \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ + \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt + \repeat + }% + %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% + \setbox0=\vbox address@hidden + \setbox2=\vbox address@hidden + % + \pagesofar +} +\catcode\@ = \other + + +\message{sectioning,} +% Chapters, sections, etc. + +% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered +% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf +% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter +% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 +% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) +\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 +\newcount\chapno +\newcount\secno \secno=0 +\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 +\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 + +% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... +\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = \@ +% +% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} +% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple +% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual +% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. +% +\def\appendixletter{% + \ifnum\appendixno=A A% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=B B% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=C C% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=D D% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=E E% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=F F% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=G G% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=H H% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=I I% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=J J% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=K K% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=L L% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=M M% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=N N% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=O O% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=P P% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=Q Q% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=R R% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=S S% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=T T% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=U U% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=V V% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=W W% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=X X% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=Y Y% + \else\ifnum\appendixno=Z Z% + % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is + % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not + % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out + % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. + \else\char\the\appendixno + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} + +% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. +% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise. +% However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks. +\def\thischapter{} +\def\thissection{} + +\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level +\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count + +% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. +\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} +\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name + +% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. +\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} +\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name + +% we only have subsub. +\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 +% +% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. +% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: +\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel +% +% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: +% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. +\def\chapheadtype{N} + +% Choose a heading macro +% #1 is heading type +% #2 is heading level +% #3 is text for heading +\def\genhead#1#2#3{% + % Compute the abs. sec. level: + \absseclevel=#2 + \advance\absseclevel by \secbase + % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: + \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 + \absseclevel = 0 + \else + \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 + \absseclevel = 3 + \fi + \fi + % The heading type: + \def\headtype{#1}% + \if \headtype U% + \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel + \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel + \fi + \else + % Check for appendix sections: + \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 + \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% + \else + \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% + address@hidden within a non-appendix chapter}% + \fi\fi + \fi + % Check for numbered within unnumbered: + \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel + \def\headtype{U}% + \else + \chardef\unmlevel = 3 + \fi + \fi + % Now print the heading: + \if \headtype U% + \ifcase\absseclevel + \unnumberedzzz{#3}% + \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% + \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% + \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% + \fi + \else + \if \headtype A% + \ifcase\absseclevel + \appendixzzz{#3}% + \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% + \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% + \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% + \fi + \else + \ifcase\absseclevel + \chapterzzz{#3}% + \or \seczzz{#3}% + \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% + \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% + \fi + \fi + \fi + \suppressfirstparagraphindent +} + +% an interface: +\def\numhead{\genhead N} +\def\apphead{\genhead A} +\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} + +% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset +% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. +% +% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers +% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. +\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty +% +\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz +\def\chapterzzz#1{% + % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such + % as an @include file. + \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 + \global\advance\chapno by 1 + % + % Used for \float. + \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% + \resetallfloatnos + % + \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% + % + % Write the actual heading. + \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% + % + % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. + \global\let\section = \numberedsec + \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec + \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec +} + +\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz +\def\appendixzzz#1{% + \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 + \global\advance\appendixno by 1 + \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% + \resetallfloatnos + % + \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% + \message{\appendixnum}% + % + \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% + % + \global\let\section = \appendixsec + \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec + \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec +} + +\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz +\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% + \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 + \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 + % + % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. + \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty + \resetallfloatnos + % + % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the + % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX + % expanded them. For example, in address@hidden The @cite{Book}', TeX + % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant + % to be executed, not expanded). + % + % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear + % as a result of the \message, we just want address@hidden' itself. We use + % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, + % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for + % the toc entries.) + \toks0 = {#1}% + \message{(\the\toks0)}% + % + \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% + % + \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec + \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec + \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec +} + +% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. +\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% + % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break + % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. + % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 + \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters + \unnmhead0{#1}% + \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax +} + +% @top is like @unnumbered. +\let\top\unnumbered + +% Sections. +\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz +\def\seczzz#1{% + \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% +} + +\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz +\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% + \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% +} +\let\appendixsec\appendixsection + +\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz +\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% + \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% +} + +% Subsections. +\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz +\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% + \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% +} + +\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz +\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% + \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% + {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% +} + +\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz +\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% + \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% + {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% +} + +% Subsubsections. +\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz +\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% + \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% + {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% +} + +\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz +\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% + \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% + {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% +} + +\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz +\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% + \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 + \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% + {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% +} + +% These macros control what the section commands do, according +% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). +% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. +\let\section = \numberedsec +\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec +\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec + +% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading + +% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: +% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit +% overlong headings to fold. +% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a +% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. +% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and +% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. + + +\def\majorheading{% + {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% + \parsearg\chapheadingzzz +} + +\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} +\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% + {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 + \parindent=0pt\raggedright + \rm #1\hfill}}% + \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax + \suppressfirstparagraphindent +} + +% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. +\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} + \suppressfirstparagraphindent} +\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} + \suppressfirstparagraphindent} +\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} + \suppressfirstparagraphindent} + +% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only +% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), +% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. + +%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) +\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} + +%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it +% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) + +\newskip\chapheadingskip + +\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} +\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} +\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} + +\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} + +\def\CHAPPAGoff{% +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager +\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak +\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} + +\def\CHAPPAGon{% +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager +\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager +\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager +\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} + +\def\CHAPPAGodd{% +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage +\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage +\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage +\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} + +\CHAPPAGon + +% Chapter opening. +% +% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, +% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. +% +% To test against our argument. +\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} +\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} +\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} +% +\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% + \pchapsepmacro + {% + \chapfonts \rm + % + % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the + % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called + % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. + \gdef\thissection{#1}% + \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% + % + % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix + % number, and don't print the unnumbered number''. + \def\temptype{#2}% + \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword + \setbox0 = \hbox{}% + \def\toctype{unnchap}% + \gdef\thischapter{#1}% + \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword + \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry + \def\toctype{omit}% + \gdef\thischapter{}% + \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword + \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% + \def\toctype{app}% + % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter + % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. And we don't + % use \thissection because that changes with each section. + % + \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: + \noexpand\thischaptername}% + \else + \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% + \def\toctype{numchap}% + \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: + \noexpand\thischaptername}% + \fi\fi\fi + % + % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the + % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc + % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. + \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% + % + % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make + % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has + % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the + % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not + % being visible, for instance under high magnification. + \donoderef{#2}% + % + % Typeset the actual heading. + \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright + \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe + \unhbox0 #1\par}% + }% + \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title + \nobreak +} + +% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. +\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax +\def\centerparameters{% + \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip + \leftskip = \rightskip + \parfillskip = 0pt +} + + +% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not +% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. +% +\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} +% +\def\unnchfopen #1{% +\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 + \parindent=0pt\raggedright + \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak +} +\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts +\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% +\par\penalty 5000 % +} +\def\centerchfopen #1{% +\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 + \parindent=0pt + \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak +} +\def\CHAPFopen{% + \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen + \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} + + +% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and +% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. +% +\newskip\secheadingskip +\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} + +% Subsection titles. +\newskip\subsecheadingskip +\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} + +% Subsubsection titles. +\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} +\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} + + +% Print any size, any type, section title. +% +% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is +% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the +% section number. +% +\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% + {% + % Switch to the right set of fonts. + \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm + % + % Insert space above the heading. + \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname + % + % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. + \def\sectionlevel{#2}% + \def\temptype{#3}% + % + \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword + \setbox0 = \hbox{}% + \def\toctype{unn}% + \gdef\thissection{#1}% + \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword + % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, + % and don't redefine \thissection. + \setbox0 = \hbox{}% + \def\toctype{omit}% + \let\sectionlevel=\empty + \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword + \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% + \def\toctype{app}% + \gdef\thissection{#1}% + \else + \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% + \def\toctype{num}% + \gdef\thissection{#1}% + \fi\fi\fi + % + % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chfplain. + \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% + % + % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). + % Again, see comments in \chfplain. + \donoderef{#3}% + % + % Output the actual section heading. + \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright + \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number + \unhbox0 #1}% + }% + % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. + % Don't allow stretch, though. + \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname + % + % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it + % was followed by glue. + \nobreak + % + % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that + % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a + % discardable item.) + \vskip-\parskip + % + % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > + % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after + % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: + % + % @section sec-whatever + % @deffn def-whatever + \penalty 10001 +} + + +\message{toc,} +% Table of contents. +\newwrite\tocfile + +% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. +% Called from @chapter, etc. +% +% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} +% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional +% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually +% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the +% destination to jump to. +% +% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or +% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. +% But if #1 is omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the +% table of contents chapter openings themselves. +% +\newif\iftocfileopened +\def\omitkeyword{omit}% +% +\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% + \edef\writetoctype{#1}% + \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else + \iftocfileopened\else + \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc + \global\tocfileopenedtrue + \fi + % + \iflinks + {\atdummies + \edef\temp{% + address@hidden + \temp + } + \fi + \fi + % + % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're + % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't + % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered + % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first + % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named + % 1', and two named 2'. + \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi +} + + +% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman +% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant +% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. +% +\def\activecatcodes{% + \catcode\"=\active + \catcode\=\active
+  \catcode\<=\active
+  \catcode\>=\active
+  \catcode\\=\active
+  \catcode\^=\active
+  \catcode\_=\active
+  \catcode\|=\active
+  \catcode\~=\active
+}
+
+
+% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
+  \setupdatafile
+  \activecatcodes
+  \input \jobname.toc
+}
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\newcount\savepageno
+\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
+
+% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
+%
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
+  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <address@hidden>
+  \contentsalignmacro
+  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+  %
+  % Don't need to put Contents' or Short Contents' in the headline.
+  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+  \def\thischapter{}%
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
+  %
+  \savepageno = \pageno
+  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+    \raggedbottom              % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+    %
+    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+}
+
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+\def\contents{%
+  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+    \fi
+    \vfill \eject
+    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \pdfmakeoutlines
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+  \endgroup
+  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+  \global\pageno = \savepageno
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\def\summarycontents{%
+  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+    %
+    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
+    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
+    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
+    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+    \secfonts
+    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
+    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
+    \rm
+    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
+    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+    \vfill \eject
+    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+  \endgroup
+  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+  \global\pageno = \savepageno
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g., A' for an appendix, or 3' for a chapter.
+%
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
+  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+  % But use \hss just in case.
+  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+  %
+  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
+  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
+  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
+  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
+  % there are before deciding ...
+  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
+}
+
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+%
+% Chapters, in the short toc.
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
+  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
+}
+
+% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
+%
+\def\appendixbox#1{%
+  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
+  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
+%
+\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+
+% Unnumbered chapters.
+\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
+\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
+\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+% Same as \defaultparindent.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+   \begingroup
+     \chapentryfonts
+     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+   \endgroup
+   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
+\let\tocentry = \entry
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+% @foo ... @end foo.
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+%
+% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+%
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+%
+\newbox\errorbox
+%
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (r' is open on the right, e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
+%
+\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+   \vbox{%
+      \hrule height\dimen2
+      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
+         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+      \hrule height\dimen2}
+    \hfil}
+%
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+
+\envdef\tex{%
+  \catcode \\=0 \catcode \{=1 \catcode \}=2
+  \catcode \=3 \catcode \&=4 \catcode \#=6 + \catcode \^=7 \catcode \_=8 \catcode \~=\active \let~=\tie + \catcode \%=14 + \catcode \+=\other + \catcode \"=\other + \catcode \|=\other + \catcode \<=\other + \catcode \>=\other + \escapechar=\\ + % + \let\b=\ptexb + \let\bullet=\ptexbullet + \let\c=\ptexc + \let\,=\ptexcomma + \let\.=\ptexdot + \let\dots=\ptexdots + \let\equiv=\ptexequiv + \let\!=\ptexexclam + \let\i=\ptexi + \let\indent=\ptexindent + \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent + \let\{=\ptexlbrace + \let\+=\tabalign + \let\}=\ptexrbrace + \let\/=\ptexslash + \let\*=\ptexstar + \let\t=\ptext + \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing + % + \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% + \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% + address@hidden@}% +} +% There is no need to define \Etex. + +% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. +% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, +% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). + +% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. +\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in + +% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other +% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't +% have any width. +\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} + +% This space is always present above and below environments. +\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt + +% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here +% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip +% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the +% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. +% +\def\aboveenvbreak{{% + % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and + % \sectionheading, q.v. + \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else + \advance\envskipamount by \parskip + \endgraf + \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount + \removelastskip + % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak + % or better ... + \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi + \vskip\envskipamount + \fi + \fi +}} + +\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak + +% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will +% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. +\let\nonarrowing=\relax + +% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around +% environment contents. +\font\circle=lcircle10 +\newdimen\circthick +\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner +\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip +\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle +% +\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth +\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} +\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} +\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} +\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip + \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr + \hskip\rskip}} +\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip + \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr + \hskip\rskip}} +% +\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip + +\envdef\cartouche{% + \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. + \startsavinginserts + \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip + \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. + \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip + \advance\cartinner by-\rskip + \cartouter=\hsize + \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either + % side, and for 6pt waste from + % each corner char, and rule thickness + \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip + % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. + \let\nonarrowing = t% + \vbox\bgroup + \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt + \carttop + \hbox\bgroup + \hskip\lskip + \vrule\kern3pt + \vbox\bgroup + \kern3pt + \hsize=\cartinner + \baselineskip=\normbskip + \lineskip=\normlskip + \parskip=\normpskip + \vskip -\parskip + \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. +} +\def\Ecartouche{% + \ifhmode\par\fi + \kern3pt + \egroup + \kern3pt\vrule + \hskip\rskip + \egroup + \cartbot + \egroup + \checkinserts +} + + +% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, +% inside a group. +\def\nonfillstart{% + \aboveenvbreak + \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy + \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. + \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines + \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output + \parskip = 0pt + \parindent = 0pt + \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes + \ifx\nonarrowing\relax + \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing + \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing + \else + \let\nonarrowing = \relax + \fi + \let\exdent=\nofillexdent +} + +% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. +% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. +% This affects the following displayed environments: +% @example, @display, @format, @lisp +% +\def\smallword{small} +\def\nosmallword{nosmall} +\let\SETdispenvsize\relax +\def\setnormaldispenv{% + \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword + \smallexamplefonts \rm + \fi +} +\def\setsmalldispenv{% + \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword + \else + \smallexamplefonts \rm + \fi +} + +% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. +% Let's do it by one command: +\def\makedispenv #1#2{ + \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} + \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} + \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak + \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak +} + +% Define two synonyms: +\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ + \makedispenv{#1}{#3} + \makedispenv{#2}{#3} +} + +% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. +% +% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. +% Originally contributed by address@hidden +% +\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% + \nonfillstart + \tt + \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. + \gobble % eat return +} + +% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. +% +\makedispenv {display}{% + \nonfillstart + \gobble +} + +% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. +% +\makedispenv{format}{% + \let\nonarrowing = t% + \nonfillstart + \gobble +} + +% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. +\envdef\flushleft{% + \let\nonarrowing = t% + \nonfillstart + \gobble +} +\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak + +% @flushright. +% +\envdef\flushright{% + \let\nonarrowing = t% + \nonfillstart + \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill + \gobble +} +\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak + + +% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) +% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since +% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and +% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. +% +\envdef\quotation{% + {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip + \parindent=0pt + % + % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. + \ifx\nonarrowing\relax + \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing + \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing + \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing + \else + \let\nonarrowing = \relax + \fi + \parsearg\quotationlabel +} + +% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're +% doing normal filling. +% +\def\Equotation{% + \par + \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else + % indent a bit. + \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% + \fi + {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% +} + +% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. +\def\quotationlabel#1{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\empty \else + {\bf #1: }% + \fi +} + + +% LaTeX-like @address@hidden verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} +% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, +% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: +% address@hidden' would look like the '@verbx' command. address@hidden +% +% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. +% +% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets +% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a +% verbatim line. +\def\dospecials{% + \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
+}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 380
+\def\uncatcodespecials{%
+  \def\do##1{\catcode##1=\other}\dospecials}
+%
+% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
+% Disable Spanish ligatures ? and ! of \tt font
+\begingroup
+  \catcode\=\active\gdef{\relax\lq}
+\endgroup
+%
+% Setup for the @verb command.
+%
+% Eight spaces for a tab
+\begingroup
+  \catcode\^^I=\active
+  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\setupverb{%
+  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
+  \catcode\=\active
+  \tabeightspaces
+  % Respect line breaks,
+  % print special symbols as themselves, and
+  % make each space count
+  % must do in this order:
+  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+}
+
+% Setup for the @verbatim environment
+%
+% Real tab expansion
+\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
+%
+\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode\^^I=\active
+  \gdef\tabexpand{%
+    \catcode\^^I=\active
+    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
+      \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
+      \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
+      \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
+      \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
+    }%
+  }
+\endgroup
+\def\setupverbatim{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
+  % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+  \tt
+  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
+  \catcode\=\active
+  \tabexpand
+  % Respect line breaks,
+  % print special symbols as themselves, and
+  % make each space count
+  % must do in this order:
+  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
+}
+
+% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
+% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
+% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
+%
+%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode[=1\catcode]=2\catcode\{=\other\catcode\}=\other
+  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
+%
+%
+% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
+% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
+%
+%
+% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
+% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
+% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
+%
+% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
+%
+\begingroup
+  \catcode\ =\active
+  \obeylines %
+  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
+  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
+  % line in the output.
+  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
+  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
+\endgroup
+%
+\envdef\verbatim{%
+    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
+}
+\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
+
+
+% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
+%
+\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
+%
+\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \setupverbatim
+    \input #1
+    \afterenvbreak
+  }%
+}
+
+% @copying ... @end copying.
+% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
+%
+% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
+% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
+% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
+% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
+% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
+% possible is very desirable.
+%
+\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
+%
+\def\insertcopying{%
+  \begingroup
+    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
+    \scanexp\copyingtext
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% @defun etc.
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+
+% Start the processing of @deffn:
+\def\startdefun{%
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
+    \medbreak
+  \else
+    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
+    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
+    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
+    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
+    % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
+    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
+    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
+    %
+    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
+    %
+    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
+    % But do insert the glue.
+    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
+  \fi
+  %
+  \parindent=0in
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+}
+
+\def\dodefunx#1{%
+  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
+  \checkenv#1%
+  %
+  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
+  % It's not a great place, though.
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi
+  %
+  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
+  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
+}
+\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
+
+%
+\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+    % common ending:
+    \interlinepenalty = 10000
+    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+    \endgraf
+    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
+    \penalty 10002  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
+    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
+    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
+    \checkparencounts
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
+
+% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
+% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
+%
+\def\makedefun#1{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
+  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
+  \temp
+}
+
+%
+% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
+% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
+%
+\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
+  \envdef#1{%
+    \startdefun
+    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
+  }%
+  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
+  \def#3%
+}
+
+%%% Untyped functions:
+
+% @deffn category name args
+\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
+
+% @deffn category class name args
+\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
+
+% \defopon {category on}class name args
+\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+
+% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
+%
+  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
+}
+
+%%% Typed functions:
+
+% @deftypefn category type name args
+\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
+
+% @deftypeop category class type name args
+\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
+
+% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
+\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+
+% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
+%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
+}
+
+%%% Typed variables:
+
+% @deftypevr category type var args
+\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
+
+% @deftypecv category class type var args
+\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
+
+% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
+\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+
+% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
+%
+  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
+}
+
+%%% Untyped variables:
+
+% @defvr category var args
+
+% @defcv category class var args
+\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
+
+% \defcvof {category of}class var args
+\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
+
+%%% Type:
+% @deftp category name args
+  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
+  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
+}
+
+% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
+\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+
+% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
+% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
+% #2 is the return type, if any.
+% #3 is the function name.
+%
+% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
+%
+\def\defname#1#2#3{%
+  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
+  %
+  % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
+  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
+  % just below it.
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
+  %
+  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
+  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
+  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
+  % The continuations:
+  % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
+  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
+  %
+  % Put the type name to the right margin.
+  \noindent
+  \hbox to 0pt{%
+    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
+    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
+    \kern\leftskip
+    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
+  }%
+  %
+  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  {%
+    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
+    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
+    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
+    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
+    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
+    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
+    % . this still does not fix the ? and ! ligatures, but so far no
+    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
+    \df \tt
+    \def\temp{#2}% return value type
+    \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
+    #3% output function name
+  }%
+  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
+  %
+  \boldbrax
+  % arguments will be output next, if any.
+}
+
+% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
+% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
+% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
+% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at -' chars.
+%
+\def\defunargs#1{%
+  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
+  % tt for the names.
+  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
+  %
+  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
+  % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that.
+  \let\var=\ttslanted
+  #1%
+  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
+}
+
+% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
+%
+\def\activeparens{%
+  \catcode$$=\active \catcode$$=\active
+  \catcode$=\active \catcode$=\active
+  \catcode\&=\active
+}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for (', etc.  For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+{
+  \activeparens
+  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+  \global\let& = \&
+
+  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
+}
+
+\newcount\parencount
+
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\newif\ifampseen
+\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
+
+\def\parenfont{%
+  \ifampseen
+    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
+    % otherwise use the default font.
+    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
+  \else
+    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
+    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
+    \sf
+  \fi
+}
+\def\infirstlevel#1{%
+  \ifampseen
+    \ifnum\parencount=1
+      #1%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
+
+\def\opnr{%
+  {\parenfont(}%
+  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
+}
+\def\clnr{%
+  {\parenfont)}%
+  \infirstlevel \sl
+}
+
+\newcount\brackcount
+\def\lbrb{%
+  {\bf[}%
+}
+\def\rbrb{%
+  {\bf]}%
+}
+
+\def\checkparencounts{%
+}
+  \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
+  \global\parencount=0
+}
+  \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
+  \global\brackcount=0
+}
+
+
+\message{macros,}
+% @macro.
+
+% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
+% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+  \newwrite\macscribble
+  \def\scantokens#1{%
+    \toks0={#1}%
+    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+    \input \jobname.tmp
+  }
+\fi
+
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \newlinechar\^^M
+    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+    % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
+    % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
+    % \catcode\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
+    % with macro expansion.                            --kasal, 19aug04
+    address@hidden \catcode\\=\active \escapechar=\@
+    % ... and \example
+    \spaceisspace
+    %
+    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
+    %
+    % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
+    %                                                  --kasal, 29nov03
+    \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\scanexp#1{%
+  \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
+  \temp
+}
+
+\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
+\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
+\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
+
+% List of all defined macros in the form
+%    \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
+% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
+% if there is a need.
+\def\macrolist{}
+
+% Add the macro to \macrolist
+     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
+     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
+}
+
+% Utility routines.
+% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
+%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
+% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
+%
+\def\cslet#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\let
+  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
+  \csname#2\endcsname
+}
+
+% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
+% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
+\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
+\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
+\def\unbrace#1{#1}
+}
+
+% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
+{\catcode\^^M=\other \catcode\Q=3%
+\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
+\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
+\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
+}
+
+% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
+% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
+
+% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
+% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
+% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+
+\def\scanctxt{%
+  \catcode\"=\other
+  \catcode\+=\other
+  \catcode\<=\other
+  \catcode\>=\other
+  \catcode\^=\other
+  \catcode\_=\other
+  \catcode\|=\other
+  \catcode\~=\other
+}
+
+\def\scanargctxt{%
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode\\=\other
+  \catcode\^^M=\other
+}
+
+\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode\{=\other
+  \catcode\}=\other
+  \catcode\^^M=\other
+  \usembodybackslash
+}
+
+\def\macroargctxt{%
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode\\=\other
+}
+
+% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
+% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
+% where N is the macro parameter number.
+% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
+% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
+
+}
+\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
+
+\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
+\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
+
+\def\macroxxx#1{%
+  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
+     \paramno=0%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
+  \fi
+  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
+     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
+     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
+     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
+     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
+  \fi
+  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
+  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
+  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
+  \fi}
+
+\parseargdef\unmacro{%
+  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
+    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
+    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
+    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
+    \begingroup
+      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
+      \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
+      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
+    \endgroup
+  \else
+    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
+% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
+%
+\def\unmacrodo#1{%
+  \ifx #1\relax
+    % remove this
+  \else
+    \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
+\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
+\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+
+% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
+% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
+% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
+
+% We need to get macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
+% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
+% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
+% it to # just before using the token list produced.
+%
+% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
+% the macro is used.
+
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
+    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
+        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
+  \fi\next}
+
+% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
+% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+
+% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
+% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
+% Much magic with \expandafter here.
+% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
+% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+\def\defmacro{%
+  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
+  \ifrecursive
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+        \egroup
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+      \paramlist{%
+          \egroup
+          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
+
+% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
+% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
+% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
+% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+\def\braceorlinexxx{%
+  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
+    \expandafter\parsearg
+  \fi \next}
+
+
+% @alias.
+% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
+% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
+\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
+\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
+\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
+  {%
+    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
+    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
+  }%
+  \next
+}
+
+
+\message{cross references,}
+
+\newwrite\auxfile
+
+\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% @inforef is relatively simple.
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{}
\file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
+% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
+% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
+% @node foo , bar , ...
+% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
+%
+\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
+%
+% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
+% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
+\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
+\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\empty
+
+% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
+% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
+%
+\def\donoderef#1{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
+    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
+%
+\newcount\savesfregister
+%
+\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
+\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
+\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
+% anchor), which consists of three parts:
+% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
+%                 or the anchor name.
+% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
+%                 empty for anchors.
+% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
+%
+% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
+% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
+% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
+%
+\def\setref#1#2{%
+  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
+    {%
+      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
+      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
+       address@hidden #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
+         ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
+      }%
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
+      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
+      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
+      \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout
+    }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
+% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
+% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
+% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+  \unsepspaces
+  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
+  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
+      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+    \else
+      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
+      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
+      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+      \else
+        \ifhavexrefs
+          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+        \else
+          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+        \fi%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Make link in pdf output.
+  \ifpdf
+    \leavevmode
+    \getfilename{#4}%
+    {\turnoffactive
+     % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
+     {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
+      \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
+     %
+     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
+       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
+     \else
+       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
+     \fi
+    }%
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
+  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
+  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
+  {%
+    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
+    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \turnoffactive
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
+      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
+  }%
+  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
+    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
+    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
+    \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
+      \refx{#1-snt}%
+    \else
+      \printedrefname
+    \fi
+    %
+    % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
+    % "in MANUALNAME".
+    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
+    %
+    % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+    % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+    % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+    % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+    % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+      \putwordsection{} \printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+    \else
+      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+      {\turnoffactive
+       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+      }%
+      % output the [mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
+      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
+      %
+      % But we always want a comma and a space:
+      ,\space
+      %
+      % output the page 3'.
+      \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\endgroup}
+
+% This macro is called from \xrefX for the [nodename]' part of xref
+% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
+% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
+% one that Bob is working on :).
+%
+\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
+
+% Things referred to by \setref.
+%
+\def\Ynothing{}
+\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
+\def\Ynumbered{%
+  \ifnum\secno=0
+  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+  \else
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\Yappendix{%
+  \ifnum\secno=0
+  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+  \else
+      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+%
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+  {%
+    \indexnofonts
+    \otherbackslash
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
+      \csname XR#1\endcsname
+  }%
+  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
+    % If not defined, say something at least.
+    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
+      \ifhavexrefs
+        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference #1'.}%
+      \else
+        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+          \global\warnedxrefstrue
+          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % It's defined, so just use it.
+    \thisrefX
+  \fi
+  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
+% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
+% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
+%
+\def\xrdef#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value.
+  %
+  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
+  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname
+    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
+      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
+    %
+    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
+    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
+      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
+    \else
+      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
+    % for later use in \listoffloats.
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
+%
+\def\tryauxfile{%
+  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+  \ifeof 1 \else
+    \global\havexrefstrue
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+}
+
+\def\setupdatafile{%
+  \catcode\^^A=\other
+  \catcode\^^B=\other
+  \catcode\^^C=\other
+  \catcode\^^D=\other
+  \catcode\^^E=\other
+  \catcode\^^F=\other
+  \catcode\^^G=\other
+  \catcode\^^H=\other
+  \catcode\^^K=\other
+  \catcode\^^L=\other
+  \catcode\^^N=\other
+  \catcode\^^P=\other
+  \catcode\^^Q=\other
+  \catcode\^^R=\other
+  \catcode\^^S=\other
+  \catcode\^^T=\other
+  \catcode\^^U=\other
+  \catcode\^^V=\other
+  \catcode\^^W=\other
+  \catcode\^^X=\other
+  \catcode\^^Z=\other
+  \catcode\^^[=\other
+  \catcode\^^\=\other
+  \catcode\^^]=\other
+  \catcode\^^^=\other
+  \catcode\^^_=\other
+  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
+  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
+  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+  %
+  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+  %
+  \catcode\^=\other
+  %
+  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
+  \catcode\~=\other
+  \catcode$=\other + \catcode$=\other
+  \catcode\"=\other
+  \catcode\_=\other
+  \catcode\|=\other
+  \catcode\<=\other
+  \catcode\>=\other
+  \catcode\=\other + \catcode\#=\other + \catcode\&=\other + \catcode\%=\other + \catcode+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off + % + % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ + % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than + % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ + % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* + % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that + % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for + % now. --karl, 15jan04. + \catcode\\=\other + % + % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. + {% + \count1=128 + \def\loop{% + \catcode\count1=\other + \advance\count1 by 1 + \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi + }% + }% + % + % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. + \catcode\{=1 + \catcode\}=2 + address@hidden +} + +\def\readdatafile#1{% +\begingroup + \setupdatafile + \input\jobname.#1 +\endgroup} + +\message{insertions,} +% including footnotes. + +\newcount \footnoteno + +% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is +% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a +% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is +% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a +% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) +\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } + +% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. +\let\footnotestyle=\comment + +{\catcode address@hidden +% +% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. +\gdef\footnote{% + \let\indent=\ptexindent + \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent + \global\advance\footnoteno by address@hidden + \edef\thisfootno{^{\the\footnoteno}}% + % + % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the + % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. + address@hidden + address@hidden + % + % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. + \unskip + address@hidden + \dofootnote +}% + +% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the +% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. +% +% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses +% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when +% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. +% +\gdef\dofootnote{% + \insert\footins\bgroup + % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the + % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. + % So reset some parameters. + \hsize=\pagewidth + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes + \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox + address@hidden + address@hidden + address@hidden + address@hidden + address@hidden + \parindent\defaultparindent + % + \smallfonts \rm + % + % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears + % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use + % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote + % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). + \let\noindent = \relax + % + % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the + % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. + \everypar = {\hang}% + \textindent{\thisfootno}% + % + % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this + % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it + % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. + \footstrut + address@hidden +} +}%end \catcode address@hidden + +% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create +% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion +% would be lost. +% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote +% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. +% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. + +% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. +% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled +% out prematurely. +% +\def\startsavinginserts{% + \ifx \insert\ptexinsert + \let\insert\saveinsert + \else + \let\checkinserts\relax + \fi +} + +% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and +% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. +% +\def\saveinsert#1{% + \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% + \afterassignment\next + % swallow the left brace + \let\temp = +} +\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} +\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} + +\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} + +\def\placesaveins#1{% + \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname + {\box#1}% +} + +% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: +{ + \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) + \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} +} + +% initialization: +\def\newsaveins #1{% + \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% + \next +} +\def\newsaveinsX #1{% + \csname newbox\endcsname #1% + \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts + \checksaveins #1}% +} + +% initialize: +\let\checkinserts\empty +\newsaveins\footins +\newsaveins\margin + + +% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. +% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. +% +% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image +% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get +% undone and the next image would fail. +\openin 1 = epsf.tex +\ifeof 1 \else + % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in + % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). + \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% + \input epsf.tex +\fi +\closein 1 +% +% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. +\newif\ifwarnednoepsf +\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to + work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get + it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} +% +\def\image#1{% + \ifx\epsfbox\undefined + \ifwarnednoepsf \else + \errhelp = \noepsfhelp + \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% + \global\warnednoepsftrue + \fi + \else + \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish + \fi +} +% +% Arguments to @image: +% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. +% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. +% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. +% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. +% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. +\newif\ifimagevmode +\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup + \catcode\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example + \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names + % If the image is by itself, center it. + \ifvmode + \imagevmodetrue + \nobreak\bigskip + % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert + % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space + % above and below. + \nobreak\vskip\parskip + \nobreak + \line\bgroup\hss + \fi + % + % Output the image. + \ifpdf + \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% + \else + % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi + \epsfbox{#1.eps}% + \fi + % + \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image +\endgroup} + + +% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, +% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the +% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. +% +\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} + +% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. +\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} + +% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically +% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, +% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. +% +% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to +% be referable. +% +% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It +% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). +% +% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each +% chapter-level command. +\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty +% +\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% + \let\thiscaption=\empty + \let\thisshortcaption=\empty + % + % don't lose footnotes inside @float. + % + % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an + % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 + % + \startsavinginserts + % + % We can't be used inside a paragraph. + \par + % + \vtop\bgroup + \def\floattype{#1}% + \def\floatlabel{#2}% + \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. + % + \ifx\floattype\empty + \let\safefloattype=\empty + \else + {% + % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, + % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. + \indexnofonts + \turnoffactive + \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% + }% + \fi + % + % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. + \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else + % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, + % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) + % + \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname + \global\advance\floatno by 1 + % + {% + % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the + % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float + % labels (which have a completely different output format) from + % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the + % lists of floats. + % + \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% + \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% + }% + \fi + % + % start with \parskip glue, I guess. + \vskip\parskip + % + % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. + \restorefirstparagraphindent +} + +% we have these possibilities: +% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap +% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 +% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap +% @float Foo & no caption: Foo +% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap +% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 +% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap +% @float & no caption: +% +\def\Efloat{% + \let\floatident = \empty + % + % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. + \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi + % + % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. + \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else + \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. + \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% + \fi + % the number. + \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% + \fi + % + % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in + % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. + \let\captionline = \floatident + % + \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else + \ifx\floatident\empty \else + \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between + \fi + % + % caption text. + \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% + \fi + % + % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. + % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. + \ifx\captionline\empty \else + \vskip.5\parskip + \captionline + % + % Space below caption. + \vskip\parskip + \fi + % + % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this + % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. + \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else + % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as + % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short + % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. + {% + \atdummies + % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M + % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so + % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. + \scanexp{% + \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% + \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty + \thiscaption + \else + \thisshortcaption + \fi + }% + }% + address@hidden + \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% + }% + \fi + \egroup % end of \vtop + % + % place the captured inserts + % + % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an + % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 + % + \checkinserts +} + +% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. +% +\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% + \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% +} + +% @caption, @shortcaption +% +\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} +\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} +\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} +\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} + +% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are +% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. +\def\getfloatno#1{% + \ifx#1\relax + % Haven't seen this figure type before. + \csname newcount\endcsname #1% + % + % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. + \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos + \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% + \fi + \let\floatno#1% +} + +% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref +% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we +% first read the @float command. +% address@hidden \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% + +% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can +% distinguish floats from other xref types. +\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} + +% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional +% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic +% \thissection value which we \setref above. +% +\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} +% +% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the +% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. +% +\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \def\iffloattype{#2}% + \ifx\temp\floatmagic +} + +% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. +% +\parseargdef\listoffloats{% + \def\floattype{#1}% floattype + {% + % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, + % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. + \indexnofonts + \turnoffactive + \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% + }% + % + % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. + \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax + \ifhavexrefs + % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. + \message{\linenumber No \safefloattype' floats to list.}% + \fi + \else + \begingroup + \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc + \let\do=\listoffloatsdo + \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname + \endgroup + \fi +} + +% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the +% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the +% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which +% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. +% +% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since +% they won't appear in the aux file). +% +\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} +\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% + % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just + % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the + % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link + % in pdf output. + \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% + % + % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. + \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% + \writeentry +}} + +\message{localization,} +% and i18n. + +% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after +% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything +% properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation. +% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here. +% +\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% + \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. + % Read the file if it exists. + \openin 1 txi-#1.tex + \ifeof 1 + \errhelp = \nolanghelp + \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% + \else + \input txi-#1.tex + \fi + \closein 1 + \endgroup +} +\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or +is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory +should work if nowhere else does.} + + +% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most +% likely, but for now just recognize it. +\let\documentencoding = \comment + + +% Page size parameters. +% +\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt + +\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt +\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt +\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt + +% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. +\vbadness = 10000 + +% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. +\hbadness = 2000 + +% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. +\widowpenalty=10000 +\clubpenalty=10000 + +% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're +% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of +% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on +% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. +% +\def\setemergencystretch{% + \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined + % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. + \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% + \else + \emergencystretch = .15\hsize + \fi +} + +% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; +% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; +% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. +% +% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define +% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. +% +\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% + \voffset = #3\relax + \topskip = #6\relax + \splittopskip = \topskip + % + \vsize = #1\relax + \advance\vsize by \topskip + \outervsize = \vsize + \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin + \pageheight = \vsize + % + \hsize = #2\relax + \outerhsize = \hsize + \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in + \pagewidth = \hsize + % + \normaloffset = #4\relax + \bindingoffset = #5\relax + % + \ifpdf + \pdfpageheight #7\relax + \pdfpagewidth #8\relax + \fi + % + \setleading{\textleading} + % + \parindent = \defaultparindent + \setemergencystretch +} + +% @letterpaper (the default). +\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 + \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt + \textleading = 13.2pt + % + % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. + \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}% + {\voffset}{.25in}% + {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% + {11in}{8.5in}% +}} + +% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. +\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 + \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt + \textleading = 12pt + % + \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% + {\voffset}{.25in}% + {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% + {9.25in}{7in}% + % + \lispnarrowing = 0.3in + \tolerance = 700 + \hfuzz = 1pt + \contentsrightmargin = 0pt + \defbodyindent = .5cm +}} + +% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. +% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) +\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 + \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt + \textleading = 12pt + % + \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% + {-.2in}{-.4in}% + {0pt}{14pt}% + {9in}{6in}% + % + \lispnarrowing = 0.25in + \tolerance = 700 + \hfuzz = 1pt + \contentsrightmargin = 0pt + \defbodyindent = .4cm +}} + +% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. +\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 + \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt + \textleading = 13.2pt + % + % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 + % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. + % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust + % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then + % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in + % your texinfo source file like this: + % @tex + % \global\normaloffset = -6mm + % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm + % @end tex + \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm} + {\voffset}{\hoffset}% + {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% + {297mm}{210mm}% + % + \tolerance = 700 + \hfuzz = 1pt + \contentsrightmargin = 0pt + \defbodyindent = 5mm +}} + +% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. +% From address@hidden, 2 July 2000. +% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. +\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 + \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt + \textleading = 12.5pt + % + \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% + {\voffset}{\hoffset}% + {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% + {210mm}{148mm}% + % + \lispnarrowing = 0.2in + \tolerance = 800 + \hfuzz = 1.2pt + \contentsrightmargin = 0pt + \defbodyindent = 2mm + \tableindent = 12mm +}} + +% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. +\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 + \afourpaper + \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% + {\voffset}{4.6mm}% + {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% + {297mm}{210mm}% + % + % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. + \globaldefs = 0 +}} + +% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. +\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 + \afourpaper + \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% + {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% + {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% + {297mm}{210mm}% + \globaldefs = 0 +}} + +% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] +% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, +% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. +% +\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} +\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi + \globaldefs = 1 + % + \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt + \setleading{\textleading}% + % + \dimen0 = #1 + \advance\dimen0 by \voffset + % + \dimen2 = \hsize + \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset + % + \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% + {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% + {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% + {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% +}} + +% Set default to letter. +% +\letterpaper + + +\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} + +% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. +\catcode\"=\other +\catcode\~=\other +\catcode\^=\other +\catcode\_=\other +\catcode\|=\other +\catcode\<=\other +\catcode\>=\other +\catcode\+=\other +\catcode\=\other
+\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\def\normaltilde{~}
+\def\normalcaret{^}
+\def\normalunderscore{_}
+\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\def\normalless{<}
+\def\normalgreater{>}
+\def\normalplus{+}
+\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
+% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
+% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
+% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $and it uses \sl anyway +% this is not a problem. +\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} + +% Turn off all special characters except @ +% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). +% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can +% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. + +\catcode\"=\active +\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} +\let"=\activedoublequote +\catcode\~=\active +\def~{{\tt\char126}} +\chardef\hat=\^ +\catcode\^=\active +\def^{{\tt \hat}} + +\catcode\_=\active +\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} +\let\realunder=_ +% Subroutine for the previous macro. +\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } + +\catcode\|=\active +\def|{{\tt\char124}} +\chardef \less=\< +\catcode\<=\active +\def<{{\tt \less}} +\chardef \gtr=\> +\catcode\>=\active +\def>{{\tt \gtr}} +\catcode\+=\active +\def+{{\tt \char 43}} +\catcode\$=\active
+\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$font-lock fix + +% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file +% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. +% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. +% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. +\def\otherifyactive{\catcode+=\other \catcode\_=\other} + address@hidden + +% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, +% as in \char\\. +\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=\\ +\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work + +% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. +% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal \' character with +% catcode other. +{\catcode\\=\active + @address@hidden@address@hidden + @address@hidden@address@hidden +} + +% \realbackslash is an actual character \' with catcode other, and +% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). +{\catcode\\=\other @address@hidden @address@hidden + +% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. +\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\backslashcurfont}} + +\catcode\\=\active + +% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters +% even after parsing them. address@hidden@turnoffactive{% + @let"address@hidden + @address@hidden + @address@hidden + @address@hidden + @address@hidden + @let|address@hidden + @let<address@hidden + @let>address@hidden + @address@hidden + @address@hidden %$ font-lock fix
+  @unsepspaces
+}
+
+% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char\\} instead of
+% the literal character \'.  (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
+% effect.)
+%
+
+% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
+% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the \input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the \' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+%
+
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a \input texinfo'. Then
+% the first \{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% that, assuming it is called before the first \' could plausibly occur.
+% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
+% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+%
+  @address@hidden @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+}
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
address@hidden = @@
+
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
+
+
+
+